Lexus IS F 2013 Owner's Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Before driving Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column. 2 When driving Driving, stopping and safe-driving information. 3 Interior features Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior features for a comfortable driving experience. 4 Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-yourself maintenance, and maintenance information. 5 When trouble arises What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire, or is involved in an accident. 6 Vehicle specifications Detailed vehicle information. 7 For owners Reporting safety defects for US owners, and seat belt, SRS airbag and headlight aim instructions for Canadian owners Index Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual. 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS Index For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual” for information regarding the equipment listed below. • • • • 1 Navigation system Air conditioning Rear view monitor system Intuitive parking assist Before driving 1-1. Key information Keys ...................................................... 28 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Smart access system with push-button start .......................... 32 Wireless remote control .............. 43 Doors.................................................... 46 Trunk...................................................... 51 • Audio/video system • Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogging • Climate control 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof Power windows................................ 78 Moon roof ........................................... 81 1-5. Refueling Opening the fuel tank cap.......... 85 1-6. Theft deterrent system Engine immobilizer system........ 88 Alarm.................................................... 90 Theft prevention labels ................. 93 1-7. Safety information 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Front seats.......................................... 55 Driving position memory ............. 56 Seat position memory ................... 60 Head restraints................................. 62 Seat belts ............................................ 65 Steering wheel.................................. 72 Anti-glare inside rear view mirror ................................................ 74 Outside rear view mirrors........... 76 2 Correct driving posture ............... 94 SRS airbags ....................................... 96 Front passenger occupant classification system.................. 108 Child restraint systems ................. 113 Installing child restraints............... 117 2 When driving 2-5. Driving information Cargo and luggage...................... 214 Vehicle load limits.......................... 217 Winter driving tips ........................ 218 1 Trailer towing................................. 220 Dinghy towing ................................ 221 2-1. Driving procedures Driving the vehicle........................ 128 Engine (ignition) switch .............. 138 Automatic transmission.............. 142 Turn signal lever .............................. 151 Parking brake ................................. 152 Horn.................................................... 153 2-2. Instrument cluster Gauges and meters ..................... 154 Indicators and warning lights................................................. 158 Multi-information display............. 161 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Headlight switch............................ 166 Fog light switch .............................. 170 Windshield wipers and washer.............................................. 172 Headlight cleaner switch ........... 176 2-4. Using other driving systems Cruise control ................................. 177 Dynamic radar cruise control.............................................. 181 Intuitive parking assist ................. 195 Driving assist systems.................. 201 PCS (Pre-Collision System) ........... 207 3 2 Interior features 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 3 Automatic air conditioning system ............................................ 224 Rear window and outside 4 rear view mirror defoggers ..................................... 232 Windshield wiper de-icer......... 233 5 3-2. Using the audio system Audio system type ....................... 234 Using the radio.............................. 237 Using the CD player................... 245 6 Playing back MP3 and WMA discs.................................. 252 Operating an iPod....................... 260 Operating a USB memory....... 268 7 Optimal use of the audio system ............................................ 277 Using the AUX port ................... 279 Using the steering wheel audio switches ............................. 281 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS Index 3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system Bluetooth® audio system ........ 284 Using the Bluetooth® audio system ............................................ 287 Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player......... 292 Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player......... 296 Bluetooth® audio system setup .............................................. 302 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Hands-free system for mobile phones ........................... 303 Using the hands-free system (for mobile phones).................. 307 Making a phone call..................... 315 Setting a mobile phone............... 319 Security and system setup........ 324 Using the phone book............... 328 3-5. Using the interior lights Interior lights list............................ 334 • Interior lights ............................... 336 • Personal lights ............................ 336 4 3-6. Using the storage features List of storage features.............. 338 • Glove box .................................... 339 • Console box............................... 340 • Overhead console .................... 341 • Cup holders................................. 342 • Bottle holders/ door pockets............................... 344 • Auxiliary box ............................... 344 3-7. Other interior features Sun visors......................................... 345 Vanity mirrors................................ 346 Clock................................................. 347 Satellite switches ......................... 348 Ashtrays ............................................ 351 Cigarette lighter........................... 352 Power outlet.................................. 353 Seat heaters.................................... 354 Armrest ............................................ 356 Trunk storage extension ........... 357 Coat hooks .................................... 359 Assist grips..................................... 360 Floor mat........................................... 361 Trunk features................................ 362 Garage door opener.................. 365 Compass........................................... 371 Safety Connect ............................. 375 4 Maintenance and care 4-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior ......................... 384 Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior........................... 388 4-2. Maintenance Maintenance requirements ...... 391 General maintenance................ 393 Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs ...................................... 396 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Do-it-yourself service precautions.................................. 397 Hood................................................. 400 Positioning a floor jack................ 401 Engine compartment................. 403 Tires .................................................... 417 Tire inflation pressure................. 428 Wheels.............................................. 432 Air conditioning filter.................. 434 Electronic key battery................ 436 Checking and replacing fuses............................................... 438 Headlight aim ................................ 452 Light bulbs....................................... 454 5 When trouble arises 5-1. Essential information 1 Emergency flashers .................... 460 If your vehicle needs to be towed .............................................. 461 If you think something is 2 wrong ............................................. 467 Fuel pump shut off system ........ 468 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency 3 If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... ........................................ 469 If a warning message is displayed....................................... 479 If you have a flat tire..................... 493 If the engine will not start ......... 502 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P............................. 503 If you lose your keys................... 504 If the electronic key does not operate properly ...................... 505 If the vehicle battery is discharged .................................. 508 If your vehicle overheats .............. 511 If the vehicle becomes stuck .... 514 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency....... 515 5 4 5 6 7 TABLE OF CONTENTS 6 Index Vehicle specifications 6-1. Specifications Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)...................... 518 Fuel information............................ 529 Tire information............................. 532 6-2. Customization Customizable features............... 544 6-3. Initialization Items to initialize ........................... 549 7 For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners........................... 552 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)................................... 553 SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)................................... 555 Headlight aim instructions for Canadian owners (in French).................................... 564 6 Index Abbreviation list................................... 568 Alphabetical index ...............................570 What to do if... ............................................581 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 Pictorial index Exterior Windshield wipers P. 172 Moon roof  P. 81 Outside rear view mirrors P. 76 Hood P. 400 Side marker lights P. 166 Headlights (low/high beam) P. 166 Front fog lights P. 170 Front turn signal lights P. 151 Parking lights/daytime running lights P. 166 Headlights (high beam) P. 166 8 Rear window defogger P. 232 *1 Side marker lights P. 166 Tail lights P. 166 Doors P. 46 Tires P. 493 ●Replacement ●Inflation pressure P. 527 P. 532 ●Information Trunk P. 51 Rear turn signal lights P. 151 Fuel filler door P. 85 : If equipped *1: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. 9 Pictorial index Seat belts P. 65 Head restraints P. 62 Interior AUX port P. 279 USB port P. 260, 268 Bottle holders/door pockets P. 344 Floor mats P. 361 Power window switches P. 78 SRS driver airbag P. 96 A SRS knee airbags P. 96 SRS front passenger airbag P. 96 Armrest P. 356 Front seats P. 55 Cup holders P. 342 Cup holders P. 342 Ashtray  P. 351 Power outlet P. 353 10 SRS side airbags P. 96 Console box P. 340 A Anti-glare inside rear view mirror P. 74 Overhead console P. 341 Personal lights P. 336 Moon roof switches  P. 81 Interior lights P. 336 Personal lights P. 336 Interior lights P. 336 “SOS” button  P. 375 Coat hooks P. 359 SRS curtain shield airbags P. 96 Assist grips P. 360 Vanity mirrors P. 346 Sun visors P. 345 Garage door opener switches P. 365 Compass  P. 371 : If equipped 11 Pictorial index Interior B Inside door lock buttons P. 46 Driving position memory switches P. 56 Seat position memory switches P. 60 Door lock switch P. 46 Outside rear view mirror switches P. 76 Window lock switch P. 78 Power window switches P. 78 12 C Automatic transmission shift lever P. 142 Seat heater switches P. 354 Shift lock override button P. 503 Cigarette lighter  P. 352 Ashtray  P. 351 Auxiliary box  P. 344 : If equipped 13 Pictorial index Headlight switch P. 166 Turn signal lever P. 151 Fog light switch P. 170 Instrument panel Paddle shift switches P. 145, 147 Multi-information display P. 161 Gauges and meters P. 154 Windshield wiper and washer switch P. 172 Engine (ignition) switch P. 138 Trunk opener main switch P. 51 Glove box P. 339 Horn P. 153 Tilt and telescopic steering control switch P. 72 Parking brake pedal P. 152 Hood release lever P. 400 14 A Without navigation system Air conditioning system P. 224 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers P. 232 Audio system P. 234 Clock P. 347 Security indicator P. 88, 90 Emergency flasher switch P. 460 15 Pictorial index Instrument panel A With navigation system Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers*2 Navigation system*2 Clock P. 347 Security indicator P. 88, 90 Air conditioning system*2 Audio system*2 Emergency flasher switch P. 460 16 B Audio remote control switches P. 281 *1 C Telephone switch P. 308 Talk switch P. 308 *1 *1 “DISP” switch P. 162 F-sport mode total control switch P. 144, 203 Cruise control switch  P. 177 Dynamic radar cruise control switch  P. 181 : If equipped *1: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. *2: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. 17 Pictorial index Instrument panel D SNOW mode switch P. 144 Windshield wiper de-icer switch  P. 233 Distance switch  P. 181 E Headlight cleaner switch  P. 176 VSC off switch P. 202 Instrument panel light control knob P. 156 Satellite switches P. 348 Trunk opener P. 51 Fuel filler door opener P. 85 : If equipped 18 For your information Main Owner’s Manual Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle. All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice. Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustration may differ from your vehicle in terms of color and equipment. Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction. Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle. This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty. 19 Installation of a mobile two-way radio system The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as: ● Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system ● Cruise control system ● Dynamic radar cruise control system ● Anti-lock brake system ● SRS airbag system ● Seat belt pretensioner system Be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system. 20 Vehicle data recordings Your Lexus is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record certain data, such as: • Engine speed • Accelerator status • Brake status • Vehicle speed • Shift position The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is equipped. Furthermore, these computers do not record conversations, sounds or pictures. ● Data usage Lexus may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality. Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except: • With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased • In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency • For use by Lexus in a lawsuit • For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner ● Usage of data collected through Safety Connect / Lexus Enform (U.S. mainland only) If your Lexus has Safety Connect or Lexus Enform and if you have subscribed to those services, please refer to the Safety Connect / Lexus Enform Telematics Subscription Service Agreement for information on data collected and its usage. 21 Event data recorder This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, • How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. 22 ● Disclosure of the EDR data Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when: • An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is obtained • In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency • For use by Lexus in a lawsuit However, if necessary, Lexus may: • Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance • Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner Scrapping of your Lexus The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle. Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries. 23 CAUTION ■ General precautions while driving Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury. Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents. Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others. ■ General precaution regarding children’s safety Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key. Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the cigarette lighter, the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children. 24 Symbols used throughout this manual Cautions & Notices CAUTION This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others. NOTICE This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment. Symbols used in illustrations Safety symbol The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen.” Arrows indicating operations Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices. Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens). 25 26 Before driving 1 1-1. Key information Keys.............................................. 28 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof Power windows.......................... 78 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Smart access system with push-button start................... 32 Moon roof .................................... 81 Wireless remote control......... 43 Doors ............................................ 46 Trunk .............................................. 51 1-5. Refueling Opening the fuel tank cap ..... 85 1-6. Theft deterrent system Engine immobilizer system........................................ 88 Alarm............................................ 90 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Front seats................................... 55 Driving position memory........ 56 Seat position memory.............. 60 Head restraints .......................... 62 Seat belts ..................................... 65 Steering wheel........................... 72 Anti-glare inside rear view mirror......................................... 74 Theft prevention labels ........... 93 1-7. Safety information Correct driving posture ......... 94 SRS airbags ................................ 96 Front passenger occupant classification system............ 108 Child restraint systems .......... 113 Installing child restraints......... 117 Outside rear view mirrors...... 76 27 1-1. Key information Keys The following keys are provided with the vehicle. Electronic keys • Operating the smart access system with push-button start (P. 32) • Operating the wireless remote control function (P. 43) Mechanical keys Key number plate ■ Card key (Canada only) Electronic key Operating the smart access system with push-button start (P. 32) Mechanical key 28 1-1. Key information Using the mechanical key Take out the mechanical key. After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key. (P. 505) ■ Card key ● The mechanical key that is stored inside the card key should be used only if a problem arises, such as when the key does not operate properly. ● If it is difficult to take out the mechanical key, push down the lock release button using a pen tip etc. If it is still difficult to pull it out, use a coin etc. ● To store the mechanical key in the card key, insert it inside while pressing the lock release button. 29 1 Before driving The mechanical key can only be inserted in one direction, as the key only has grooves on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt to insert it. 1-1. Key information ● If the battery cover is not installed and the battery falls out or if the battery was removed because the key got wet, reinstall the battery with the positive terminal facing the Lexus emblem. ● The card key is not waterproof. ■ When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant Turn the trunk opener main switch off and lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (P. 51, 338) Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only. ■ Key number plate Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that a mechanical key is lost, a new key can be made at your Lexus dealer using the key number plate. (P. 504) ■ When riding in an aircraft When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an electronic key in your bag etc, ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft. 30 1-1. Key information NOTICE ■ To prevent key damage Observe the following: 1 ● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them. ● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc. ● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to such materials. ● Do not disassemble the keys. ● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio systems and induction cookers, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-frequency therapy equipment. ■ Precautions for handling the card keys ● Do not apply excess force when inserting the mechanical key to the card key. Doing so may damage the card key. ● If the battery or card key terminals get wet, the battery may corrode and the card key may stop working. If the key is dropped into water, or if drinking water etc. is spilled on the key, immediately remove the battery cover and wipe the battery and terminals. (To remove the battery cover, lightly grasp and pull it.) If the battery is corroded, have your Lexus dealer replace the battery. ● Do not crush the battery cover or use a screwdriver to remove the battery cover. Forcibly removing the battery cover may bend or damage the key. ● If the battery cover is frequently removed, the battery cover may become loose. ● When installing the battery, make sure to check the direction of the battery. Installing the battery in the wrong direction may cause the battery to deplete rapidly. ● The surface of the card key may be damaged, or its coating may peel off in the following situations: • The card key is carried together with hard objects, such as coins or keys. • The card key is scraped with a sharp object, such as a tip of mechanical pencil. • The surface of the card key is wiped with thinners or benzene. 31 Before driving ● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for a long period of time. 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Smart access system with push-button start The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key (including the card key) on your person, for example in your pocket. (The driver should always carry the electronic key.) Electronic key Electronic key Electronic key Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 33) Unlocks the trunk (P. 33) Starts the engine (P. 138) : Canada only 32 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Unlocking and locking the doors (front door handles only) Grip the driver’s door handle to unlock the door. Grip the passenger’s door handle to unlock all the doors.* The door cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the door is locked. *: The door unlock settings can be changed. (P. 37) Press the lock button to lock the door. Unlocking the trunk Press the button to unlock the trunk. 33 Before driving Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle. 1 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Antenna location and effective range ■ Antenna location Antennas outside cabin Antennas inside cabin Antenna inside trunk Antenna outside trunk 34 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected) When locking or unlocking the doors When unlocking the trunk The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (70 cm) of the trunk release button. When starting the engine or changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle. 35 1 Before driving The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (70 cm) of either of the outside front door handles. (Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.) 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Operation signals A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice) ■ Conditions affecting operation The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start from operating properly: (Ways of coping: P. 505) ● When the electronic key battery is depleted ● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise ● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication devices ● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic objects • Cards to which aluminum foil is attached • Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside • Metallic wallets or bags • Coins • Hand warmers made of metal • Media such as CDs and DVDs ● When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity ● When another wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby ● When carrying or using the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves • Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves • Personal computer or personal digital assistant (PDA) • Digital audio player • Portable game system ● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window 36 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Switching the door unlock function It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks. STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. STEP 2 When the indicator on the key surface is turned off, push and hold The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2.) Multi-information display 1 for approximately 5 seconds while pushing Unlocking doors Beep Hold the driver's door handle to unlock only the driver's Exterior: Beeps three door. times Hold the front passenger’s Interior: Pings once door handle to unlock all doors. Hold either front door handle Exterior: Beeps twice to unlock all doors. Interior: Pings once To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open and close a door once after the settings have been changed. (If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.) In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P.90) 37 Before driving , , or on the key. 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Battery-saving function In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to prevent the vehicle and electronic key batteries from discharging. ● When the entry function has not been used for 30 days or more ● When the electronic key has been left within approximately 3 ft. (1 m) of the vehicle for 10 minutes or more The system will resume operation when... ● The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch. ● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control function. (P. 43) ● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (P. 505) ■ Electronic key battery depletion ● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The card key battery life is about a year and a half.) ● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the engine stops. (P. 489) ● The battery becomes depleted even if the electronic key is not used because the key always receives radio waves. If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does not operate, or the detection area becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. ( P. 436) ● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the engine stops. (P. 40, 489) ● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field. • • • • • • 38 TVs Personal computers Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones Induction cookers Table lamps 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ To operate the system properly Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle. ■ Note for the entry function ● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases. • The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked. • The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked. • The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the glove box when the engine is started or “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes are changed. ● Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle. ● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone. ● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the engine if the electronic key is near the window. ● The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.) ● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door. ● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.) ● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle operation may prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again. 39 1 Before driving Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not function.) 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle. ■ Security feature If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the anti-theft system automatically locks the vehicle again. ■ Alarms and warning indicators A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warnings displayed on the multi-information display is used to prevent theft of the vehicle and unforeseeable accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in response to any warning indications on the multi-information display. (P. 479) The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only alarms are sounded. Alarm Exterior alarm sounds once for 2 seconds Situation Correction procedure Tried to lock the doors using the entry function while the electronic key is still inside the passenger compartment Retrieve the electronic key from the passenger compartment and lock the doors again. Closed the trunk while the electronic key is still inside and all doors are locked Retrieve the electronic key from the trunk and close the trunk lid. Tried to exit the vehicle with the electronic key and lock Exterior alarm sounds once for 60 the doors without first turning the “ENGINE START STOP” seconds switch OFF Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and lock the doors again. Exterior alarm Tried to lock the vehicle using Close all of the doors sounds once for 10 the entry function while a and lock the doors seconds door is open again. 40 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Alarm Interior alarm sounds continuously Situation Correction procedure Tried to open the door and exit the vehicle without shifting the shift lever to P Shift the shift lever to P. 1 Before driving Switched to ACCESSORY mode while the driver's door is open (Opened the driver's Close the driver's door. door when the “ENGINE Interior alarm pings START STOP” switch is in continuously ACCESSORY mode.) Turned the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF while the Close the driver's door. driver's door is open ■ If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly ● Locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: Use the mechanical key. (P. 505) ● Starting the engine:P. 506 ■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted P. 436 ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer It is possible to deactivate the operation signals of the system, such as the emergency flashers. (Customizable featuresP. 544) ■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: NI4TMLF-1 FCC ID: HYQ14AEM FCC ID: HYQ14ABB FCC ID: HYQ13BZS FCC ID: HYQ14ABK FCC ID: HYQ14ABS FCC ID: HYQ13CZA 41 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada NOTE: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION ■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices ● People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away from the smart access system antennas. (P. 34) The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function. ● User of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices. Ask your Lexus dealer for details for disabling the entry function. 42 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Wireless remote control The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle and the trunk from outside the vehicle. Locks all doors Unlocks all doors 1 Before driving Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors. Opens the windows and moon roof (push and hold)* Unlocks the trunk (push and hold) Sounds alarm (push and hold) (P. 44) *: This setting must be customized at your Lexus dealer. ■ Operation signals Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice) Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked. Windows and moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon roof are operating. ■ Door lock buzzer If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds if an attempt to lock the door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more. ■ Alarm Using the wireless remote control to lock the doors will set the alarm system. 43 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Panic mode When is pushed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound for about 60 seconds and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle. To stop the alarm, push any button on the wireless remote control. ■ Electronic key battery depletion P. 38 ■ Security feature P. 40 ■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted P. 436 ■ Conditions affecting operation P. 36 ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Settings (e.g. trunk unlocking function) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 544) 44 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Certification for wireless remote control For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: HYQ14AEM FCC ID: HYQ14ABB FCC ID: HYQ13BZS FCC ID: HYQ14ABK FCC ID: HYQ14ABS FCC ID: HYQ13CZA 1 FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada NOTE: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 45 Before driving NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Doors The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless remote control or door lock switch. ■ Entry function P. 33 ■ Wireless remote control P. 43 ■ Door lock switch Locks all doors Unlocks all doors ■ Inside lock button Locks the door Unlocks the door The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handle even if the lock buttons are in the lock position. 46 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Locking the front doors from the outside without a key The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle. Rear door child-protector lock The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the locks are set. Unlock Lock These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors. 47 Before driving Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked. 1 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Automatic door locking and unlocking systems The following functions can be set or cancelled: Function Operation Shift position linked door locking function Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all doors. Shift position linked door unlocking function Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all doors. Speed linked door locking function All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher. Driver's door linked door unlocking function All doors are unlocked when the driver's door is opened within approximately 45 seconds after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. ■ Setting and canceling the functions To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below: STEP 1 STEP 2 Close all the doors and switch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode. (Perform the step 2 within 10 seconds.) Shift the shift lever to P or N, press and hold the driver's door lock or ) for about switch ( 5 seconds then release. The shift lever and switch positions corresponding to the desired function to be set are shown as follows. Use the same procedure to cancel the function. 48 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Function Shift lever position Shift position linked door locking function 1 P Before driving Shift position linked door unlocking function Driver’s door lock switch position Speed linked door locking function Driver's door linked door unlocking function N When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are locked and then unlocked. ■ Impact detection door lock release system In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked. Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system may not operate. ■ Using the mechanical key The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 505) ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 544) 49 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk CAUTION ■ To prevent an accident Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle. Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Always use a seat belt. ● Always lock all doors. ● Ensure that all doors are properly closed. ● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving. The doors may be opened and the passengers may be thrown out of the vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury. Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the inside lock buttons are in locked position. ● Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear seat. 50 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Trunk The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or wireless remote control. ■ Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle Press the opener switch. 1 Before driving ■ Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle Entry function P. 33 Wireless remote control P. 43 Locking the trunk opener feature Turn the main switch in the glove box off to disable the trunk opener. On Off The trunk lid cannot be opened even with the wireless remote control or the entry function. 51 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Trunk light When the trunk light switch is set to on, the trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened. On Off ■ Trunk handle Use the trunk handle when closing the trunk. Be careful not to pull the trunk lid sideways when closing the trunk with the handle. ■ Internal trunk release lever The trunk lid can be opened by pulling down on the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside of the trunk lid. The lever will continue to glow for some time after the trunk lid is closed. ■ Using the mechanical key The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (P. 505) ■ Which key to the vehicle is to leave with a parking attendant after disabling the trunk opener main switch P. 30 52 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk CAUTION ■ Caution while driving ● Keep the trunk lid closed while driving. ● Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, causing an accident. ● Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury. ■ When children are in the vehicle Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Do not allow children to enter the trunk. If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could overheat or suffocate. ● Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid. Doing so may cause the trunk lid to operate unexpectedly, or cause the child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid. 53 1 Before driving If the trunk lid is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or luggage in the trunk may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident. In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a serious health hazard. Make sure to close the trunk lid before driving. 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk CAUTION ■ Using the trunk Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury. ● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened. ● When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe. ● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the trunk is about to open or close. ● Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind. ● The trunk lid may suddenly shut if it is not opened fully. It is more difficult to open or close the trunk lid on an incline than on a level surface, so beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk. ● When closing the trunk lid, take extra care to prevent your fingers etc. from being caught. ● When closing the trunk lid, make sure to press it lightly on its outer surface. If the trunk handle is used to fully close the trunk lid, it may result in hands or arms being caught. ● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid. Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened. 54 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Front seats 1 Before driving Seat position switch Seatback angle switch Seat cushion (front) angle switch Vertical height adjustment switch Lumbar support switch CAUTION ■ Seat adjustment Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt. If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. 55 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Driving position memory (driver’s seat) Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be memorized and recalled with the touch of a button. It is also possible to set this function to activate automatically when the doors are unlocked. Three different driving positions can be entered into memory. ■ Entering a position to memory STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode. STEP 2 Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view mirrors to the desired positions. Push the “SET” button, then STEP 3 within 3 seconds push button “1”, “2” or “3” until the signal beeps. If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten. ■ Recalling the memorized position Check that the shift lever is set in P. STEP 1 STEP 2 56 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode. Push button “1”, “2” or “3” to recall the memorized position. 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before performing the following. The driving position is recalled when the driver's door is unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control and the driver’s door is opened. To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, open and close a door once after a driving position has been recorded. (If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.) In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 90) 57 1 Before driving Using the wireless remote control STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the driver's door. While pressing the desired button STEP 2 (“1”, “2” or “3”), push on the wireless remote control until the signal beeps. 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Using the door lock switch Carry only the key (including the card key) to which you want to link the driving position. If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be linked properly. STEP 1 STEP 2 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the driver's door. While pressing the desired button (“1”, “2” or “3”), press the lock or unlock side on the driver’s door lock switch until the signal beeps. The driving position is recalled when the driver's door is unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control and the driver's door is opened. : Canada only 58 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) ■ Canceling the linked door unlock operation STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the driver's door. STEP 2 Using the wireless remote control: While pushing the “SET” button, press ■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF Memorized positions (except for the steering wheel position) can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again, even after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. ■ To cancel seat position recall Perform any of the following operations. ● Push the “SET” button. ● Push button “1”, “2” or “3”. ● Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall). ■ If the battery is disconnected The memorized positions are erased when the battery is disconnected. CAUTION ■ Seat adjustment caution Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel. 59 1 Before driving on the wireless remote control until the signal beeps. Using the door lock switch: While pressing the “SET” button, press the lock or unlock side on the door lock switch until the signal beeps. 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Seat position memory (front passenger’s seat) Your preferred front passenger seat position can be memorized and recalled with the touch of a button. Three different seat positions can be entered into memory. ■ Entering a position to memory STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode. STEP 2 Adjust the front passenger seat to the desired position. Push the “SET” button, then STEP 3 within 3 seconds push button “1”, “2” or “3” until the signal beeps. If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten. ■ Recalling the memorized position Check that the shift lever is set in P. Push button “1”, “2” or “3” to recall the memorized position. 60 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) ■ Operating the seat position memory after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF Memorized position can be activated up to 180 seconds after the front passenger door is opened, even after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. 1 ■ To cancel seat position recall Before driving Perform any of the following operations. ● Push the “SET” button. ● Push button “1”, “2” or “3”. ● Adjust the seat position using the switches. ■ If the battery is disconnected The memorized positions are erased when the battery is disconnected. CAUTION ■ Seat adjustment caution Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger. 61 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Head restraints Head restraints are provided for all seats. Vertical adjustment (front seats) Up Pull the head restraints up. Down Push the head restraint down while pushing the lock release button. Lock release button Folding operation (rear seats) To stow the head restraint by folding it forward, pull the head restraint up while pushing the lock release button. Only the button on the right stay (when facing the front of the vehicle) can be used to fold the head restraint forward. Lock release button ■ Removing the head restraints (front seats) Pull the head restraint up while pushing the lock release button. 62 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) ■ Installing the head restraints (front seats) Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position. Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint. Pull the head restraint up while pushing both of the lock release buttons. Lock release buttons ■ Installing the head restraints (rear seats) Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position. 63 Before driving ■ Removing the head restraints (rear seats) 1 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) ■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears. ■ When using the rear seat head restraints Make sure the head restraints are not in the stowed/folded position while in use. CAUTION ■ Head restraint precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat. ● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times. ● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position. ● Do not drive with the head restraints removed. 64 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Seat belts Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. ■ Correct use of the seat belts 1 Before driving ● Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder. ● Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips. ● Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat. ● Do not twist the seat belt. ■ Fastening and releasing the seat belt Fastening the belt Push the tab into the buckle until a clicking sound is heard. Releasing the belt Press the release button. Release button 65 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) ■ Adjusting the height of the belt (front seats) Down (while pressing the height adjuster) Up Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click. Seat belt comfort guide (rear seats) If the shoulder belt sits close to a person’s neck, slide the seat belt comfort guide forward. Seat belt pretensioners The pretensioner helps the seat belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal collision. The pretensioner may not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a side impact, a rear impact or a vehicle rollover. 66 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-collision system) If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the precollision safety system will retract the seat belt, thus enhancing the effectiveness of the seat belt pretensioner in a crash. ■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR) The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward or pull out the belt too quickly. Allow the belt to fully retract, and then slowly extend the belt. If the belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor, firmly pull the belt and release it. You will then be able to smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor. ■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR) When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 117) ■ Pregnant women Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 65) Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants. Extend the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the abdominal area. If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision. 67 Before driving The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or loses control of the vehicle. (P. 207) 1 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) ■ People suffering illness Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. ■ Child seat belt usage The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size. ● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 113) ● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt, follow the instructions on P. 65 regarding seat belt usage. ■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions. ■ Seat belt extender If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge. 68 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) CAUTION Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. Failing to do so may cause death or severe injury. 1 ■ Wearing a seat belt ● Always wear a seat belt properly. ● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including children. ● Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system. ● Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seating position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. ● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm. ● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips. ■ When children are in the vehicle Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt. ■ Seat belt pretensioners ● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision. ● If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer. 69 Before driving ● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt. 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) CAUTION ■ Adjustable shoulder anchor Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or collision. (P. 66) ■ Seat belt damage and wear Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly resulting in death or serious injury. ● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door. ● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury. ● Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. ● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there's no obvious damage. ● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. ■ Using a seat belt extender ● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender. ● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. ● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended. 70 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) NOTICE ■ When using a seat belt extender When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself. 1 Before driving 71 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Steering wheel The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position. Up Down Away from the driver Toward the driver Auto tilt away When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned OFF, the steering wheel returns to its stowed position by moving up and away to enable easier driver entry and exit. Switching to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode will return the steering wheel to the original position. 72 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) ■ The steering wheel can be adjusted when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. ■ Automatic adjustment of the steering position A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory. (P. 56) 1 Before driving ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer It is possible to deactivate the auto tilt-away function. (Customizable featuresP. 544) CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. 73 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Anti-glare inside rear view mirror In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles behind and automatically reduce the reflected light. Without compass Turns automatic mode on Turns automatic mode off The indicator comes on when automatic mode is turned on. The anti-glare mirror default mode is automatic. The antiglare mirror is automatically set to automatic whenever the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned IGNITION ON mode. With compass Turns automatic mode on/off The indicator comes on when automatic mode is turned on. The anti-glare mirror default mode is automatic. The antiglare mirror is automatically set to automatic whenever the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned IGNITION ON mode. 74 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Adjusting the height of rear view mirror Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down. 1 Before driving ■ To prevent sensor error To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them. CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving. Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. 75 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Outside rear view mirrors Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. Select a mirror to adjust (“L”: left or “R”: right) Adjust the mirror up, down, in, or out using the switch ■ The mirrors can be operated when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. ■ When the mirrors are fogged up Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (P. 232) ■ Folding back the mirrors Push back in the direction of the vehicle's rear. ■ One-touch adjustment of the mirror angle A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and adjusted with the touch of a button. (P. 56) 76 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) ■ Linked mirror function when reversing The outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. However, this function will not operate when the mirror select switch is in the neutral position (between “L” and “R”). 1 ■ Auto anti-glare function CAUTION ■ When driving the vehicle Observe the following precautions while driving. Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. ● Do not drive with the mirrors folded back. ● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving. ■ When the mirror defoggers are operating Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you. 77 Before driving When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (P. 74) 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof Power windows The power windows can be opened and closed using the following switches. Closing One-touch closing* Opening One-touch opening* *: To stop the window partway, operate the switch in the opposite direction. Lock switch Press the switch down to lock the passenger window switches. Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window. The passenger windows can still be opened and closed using the driver’s switch even if the lock switch is on. ■ The power windows can be operated when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ Door lock linked window operation The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. (P. 505) 78 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof ■ Operating the power windows after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot be closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch on the relevant door. ● After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the power window switch in the one-touch closing position while the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode. ● If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation explained above, initialize the function by performing the following procedure. STEP 1 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. Con- tinue holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the window has closed. STEP 2 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position. Con- tinue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has opened completely. STEP 3 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position once again. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has closed. If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning. If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 544) 79 1 Before driving OFF The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened. ■ Jam protection function If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly. ■ When the power window does not close normally 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof CAUTION ■ Closing the windows Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated. ● Do not allow children to operate the power windows. Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some instances, even death. ■ Jam protection function ● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally. ● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closes. 80 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof Moon roof Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up and down. ■ Opening and closing 1 Open* Before driving The moon roof stops slightly before the fully opened position. Push the switch again to fully open. Close* *: Lightly press either of the moon roof switches to stop the moon roof partway. ■ Tilting up and down Tilt up* Tilt down* *: Lightly press either of the moon roof switches to stop the moon roof partway. : If equipped 81 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof ■ The moon roof can be operated when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ Moon roof open warning buzzer The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument panel when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned OFF and the driver's door is opened with the moon roof open. ■ Door lock linked moon roof operation The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. (P. 505) ■ Operating the moon roof after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened. ■ Jam protection function If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly. ■ To reduce moon roof wind noise Drive with the moon roof opened to slightly before the fully open position as driving with the moon roof opened fully will cause wind noise. ■ Sunshade The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened. 82 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof ■ When the moon roof does not close normally Perform the following procedure: ● If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly STEP 1 Stop the vehicle. 1 STEP 2 Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.*1 STEP 3 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch. ● If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up STEP 1 Stop the vehicle. STEP 2 Press and hold the “TILT” switch*1 until the moon roof moves into the tilt up position and stops. STEP 3 Release the “TILT” switch once and then press and hold the “TILT” switch again.*1 The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up position.*2 Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close. STEP 4 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch. *1: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning. *2: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause, automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the “CLOSE” or “TILT” switch, and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch. If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 544) 83 Before driving The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds.*2 Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close. 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof CAUTION ■ Opening the moon roof Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury. ● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving. ● Do not sit on top of the moon roof. ■ Closing the moon roof Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in a position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being operated. ● Do not allow children to operate the moon roof. Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury. ■ Jam protection function ● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally. ● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closes. 84 1-5. Refueling Opening the fuel tank cap Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap. ■ Before refueling the vehicle Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and ensure that all the doors and windows are closed. 1 STEP 1 Press the opener switch. STEP 2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to open. STEP 3 Hang the fuel tank cap on the back of the fuel filler door. Before driving ■ Opening the fuel tank cap 85 1-5. Refueling Closing the fuel tank cap When replacing the fuel tank cap, turn it until a clicking sound is heard. After releasing your hand, the cap will turn slightly in the opposite direction. ■ Fuel types Use unleaded gasoline. (Octane rating 91 [Research Octane Number 96] or higher) ■ Fuel tank capacity (reference) 16.9 gal. (64 L, 14.0 Imp. gal.) ■ When the fuel filler door opener is inoperable The lever can be used to open the fuel filler door if the fuel filler door cannot be opened using the inside switch because the battery is discharged or for any other reason. 86 1-5. Refueling CAUTION ■ Refueling the vehicle Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. 1 ● Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static electricity. ● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it. A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause injury. ● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to come close to an open fuel tank. ● Do not inhale vaporized fuel. Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled. ● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle. Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire. ● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged. This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard. ■ When replacing the fuel cap Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Failure to do so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ Refueling Do not spill fuel during refueling. Failing to do so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted surface. 87 Before driving Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel vapors to ignite. 1-6. Theft deterrent system Engine immobilizer system The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's on-board computer. Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle. The indicator light flashes after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch has been turned OFF to indicate that the system is operating. The indicator light stops flashing after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch has been turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode to indicate that the system has been canceled. ■ System maintenance The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system. ■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction ● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object ● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle 88 1-6. Theft deterrent system ■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1 FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. NOTICE ■ To ensure the system operates correctly Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed. 89 1 Before driving This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1-6. Theft deterrent system Alarm The system sounds the alarm and flashes the lights when forcible entry is detected. ■ Triggering of the alarm The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set. ● A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry function, wireless remote door lock function or mechanical key. ● The hood is opened. ■ Setting the alarm system Close the doors, trunk and hood, and lock all doors. The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds. The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the system is set. ■ Deactivating or stopping the alarm Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm. ● Unlock the doors or trunk. ● Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.) 90 1-6. Theft deterrent system ■ Items to check before locking the vehicle To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following. 1 ● Nobody is in the vehicle. ● The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set. Before driving ● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle. ■ Triggering of the alarm The alarm may be triggered in the following situations. Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system. ● A person inside the vehicle opens a door, the trunk or hood. ● The battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked. ■ Alarm-operated door lock ● When the alarm is operating, the doors are locked automatically to prevent intruders. ● Do not leave the key inside the vehicle when the alarm is operating, and make sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the battery. ■ When the battery is disconnected Be sure to deactivate the alarm system. If the battery is disconnected before deactivating the alarm system, the alarm may be triggered when the battery is reconnected. 91 1-6. Theft deterrent system NOTICE ■ To ensure the system operates correctly Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed. 92 1-6. Theft deterrent system Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.) These labels are attached to the vehicle to reduce vehicle theft by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. Do not remove under penalty of law. 1 Before driving 93 1-7. Safety information Correct driving posture Drive in a good posture as follows: Sit upright and well back in the seat. (P. 55) Adjust the position of the seat forward or backward to ensure the pedals can be reached and easily depressed to the extent required. (P. 55) Adjust the seatback so that the controls are easily operable. (P. 55) Adjust the tilt and telescopic positions of the steering wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest. (P. 72) Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (P. 62) Wear the seat belt correctly. (P. 65) 94 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ While driving ● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving. 1 Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. ● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback. ● Do not place anything under the front seats. Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged. ■ Adjusting the seat position: ● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat. ● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury. Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism. 95 Before driving A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or serious injury to the driver or passenger. 1-7. Safety information SRS airbags The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury. SRS front airbags SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components. SRS knee airbags Can help provide driver and front passenger protection. SRS side and curtain shield airbags SRS side airbags Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants. SRS curtain shield airbags Can help protect primarily the head of occupants. 96 1-7. Safety information Airbag system components 1 Before driving Knee airbags Front passenger airbag Curtain shield airbags “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights Side airbags Side and curtain shield airbag sensors Curtain shield airbag sensors SRS warning light Driver airbag Seat belt pretensioners and force limiters Driver's seat belt buckle switch Driver's seat position sensor Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch Airbag sensor assembly Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors) Front airbag sensors 97 1-7. Safety information Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram above. This information includes crash severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants. ■ SRS warning light This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors), “AIR BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (P. 470) ■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) ● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating) SRS airbag. ● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted. ● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats, and parts of the front pillar, rear pillar and roof side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot. ● The windshield may crack. ● For Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event of a severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emergency call to the response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location (without needing to push the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency services. (P. 375) 98 1-7. Safety information ■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (front airbags) ● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform). ● Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will activate. ● The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied. (P. 108) ■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (side and curtain shield airbags) ● The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]). ● The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the side airbag on the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied. (P. 108) 99 Before driving However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.). 1 1-7. Safety information ■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration. ● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface ● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole ● Landing hard or vehicle falling ■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (front airbags) The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur. ● Collision from the side ● Collision from the rear ● Vehicle rollover 100 1-7. Safety information ■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (side and curtain shield airbags) The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment. 1 ● Collision from the side to the vehicle body Before driving other than the passenger compartment ● Collision from the side at an angle The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision. ● Collision from the front ● Collision from the rear ● Vehicle rollover 101 1-7. Safety information ■ When to contact your Lexus dealer In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. ● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated. ● The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS airbags to inflate. ● A portion of the doors is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate. ● The pad section of the steering wheel, front passenger airbag cover or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. ● The surface of the seats with the side airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. ● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. 102 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ SRS airbag precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. 1 ● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. ● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises: Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways: • Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably. • Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature. • If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck. The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls. 103 Before driving The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts. 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ SRS airbag precautions ● If the seat belt extender has been connected to the front seat belt buckles but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the seat belt, the SRS front airbags will judge that the driver and front passenger are wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the SRS front airbags may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender. ● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright. ● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children. (P. 113) 104 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ SRS airbag precautions ● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard. SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger. ● Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or passenger have items resting on their knees. ● Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars. ● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seat toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle. 105 Before driving ● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the 1 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ SRS airbag precautions ● Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad or lower portion of the instrument panel. These items can become projectiles when SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy. ● Do not attach anything to areas such as the door, windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assist grip. ● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and seriously injure or kill you, should the SRS curtain shield airbag deploy. ● If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it. ● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. ● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components shown on P. 97. Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction. ● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot. ● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation. ● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front pillar garnish, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexus dealer. 106 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components ● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags ● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails. ● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment ● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo bar etc.) ● Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system ● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players ● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability 107 1 Before driving Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer. The SRS airbag may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury. 1-7. Safety information Front passenger occupant classification system Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger. SRS warning light “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light “AIR BAG ON” indicator light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light 108 1-7. Safety information Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system ■ Adult*1 “AIR BAG ON” Off Flashing*2 Activated ■ Child *3 or child restraint system*4 “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights Indicator/ SRS warning light warning light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag Side airbag on the front passenger seat Devices Front passenger knee airbag Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner “AIR BAG OFF” *5 Off Flashing*2 Deactivated Activated 109 1 Before driving “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights Indicator/ SRS warning light warning light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag Side airbag on the front passenger seat Devices Front passenger knee airbag Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner 1-7. Safety information ■ Unoccupied Indicator/ warning light Devices “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indiNot illuminated cator lights SRS warning light Off Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag Side airbag on the front Deactivated passenger seat Front passenger knee airbag Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Activated Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Deactivated ■ There is a malfunction in the system Indicator/ warning light Devices “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights SRS warning light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag Side airbag on the front passenger seat Front passenger knee airbag Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner “AIR BAG OFF” On Off Deactivated Activated *1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/ her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture. *2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt. *3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture. 110 1-7. Safety information *4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (P. 113) *5: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual as for installing the child restraint system properly. (P. 117) ■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant classification system. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. ● Wear the seat belt properly. ● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat. ● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the passenger may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of collision. ● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat. ● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs. ● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat. 111 Before driving CAUTION 1 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions ● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system. ● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward. ● When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (P. 117) ● Do not modify or remove the front seats. ● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately. ● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seat- backs. ● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface. ● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat. 112 1-7. Safety information Child restraint systems A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child restraint systems. 1 Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat. ● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child. ● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system. General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (P. 117) Types of child restraints Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child. Infant seat 113 Before driving Points to remember 1-7. Safety information Convertible seat Booster seat ■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system ● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. ● If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 65) CAUTION ■ Child restraint precautions ● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior. 114 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ Child restraint precautions ● Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat. ● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured. ● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident. ● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child. ● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident. 115 Before driving ● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even 1 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ When children are in the vehicle Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child's neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt. ■ When the child restraint system is not in use ● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment. ● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident. 116 1-7. Safety information Installing child restraints Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly secure child restraints to the rear seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint. 1 The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system. Before driving Child restraint LATCH anchors are provided for the rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.) Seat belts equipped with a child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/ELR belts except driver’s seat belt) (P. 65) Anchor bracket (for top tether strap) Anchor brackets are provided for each rear seat. 117 1-7. Safety information Installation with LATCH system Type A Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly. STEP 2 Latch the hooks onto the LATCH anchors. STEP 3 If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchors. For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system. STEP 1 Canada only 118 1-7. Safety information Type B Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly. STEP 2 Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors. STEP 3 If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchors. For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system. STEP 1 Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt) ■ Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat Place the child seat on the rear STEP 1 seat facing the rear of the vehicle. 119 Before driving Canada only 1 1-7. Safety information STEP 2 STEP 3 Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. Fully extend the shoulder belt and then allow it to retract slightly in order to activate the ALR lock mode. Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only. STEP 4 While pushing the child seat down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place. After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended. ■ Forward facing Convertible seat Place the child seat on the seat STEP 1 facing the front of the vehicle. 120 1-7. Safety information STEP 2 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only. STEP 4 While pushing the child seat into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place. After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended. If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchors. 121 1 Before driving STEP 3 Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. 1-7. Safety information ■ Booster seat STEP 1 STEP 2 Place the booster seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle. Sit the child in the booster seat. Fit the seat belt to the booster seat according to the manufacturer's instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's shoulder, and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (P. 65) Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt. 122 1-7. Safety information Child restraint systems with a top tether strap STEP 1 Secure the child restraint using a seat belt or the lower anchors, and lock the head restraint in place at the original position. 1 Before driving STEP 2 Open the anchor bracket cover, latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap. Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched. ■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2. Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used. This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819. CAUTION ■ When installing a booster seat Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR lock mode: (P. 67) ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort to the child. 123 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ When installing a child restraint system Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place. If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. ● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat. ● Only put a forward facing or booster child seat on the front seat when unavoidable. When installing a forward facing or booster child seat on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate). ● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. ● Make sure the outside rear seat head restraints are not in the folded position. ● Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted. ● Push and pull the child seat from side to side and forward to be sure it is secure. ● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat. ● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. 124 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ Do not use a seat belt extender ■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident. 125 1 Before driving If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. 1-7. Safety information 126 When driving 2-1. Driving procedures Driving the vehicle.................. 128 2 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Engine (ignition) switch......... 138 Headlight switch ..................... 166 Automatic transmission ........ 142 Fog light switch ........................ 170 Turn signal lever........................ 151 Parking brake........................... 152 Windshield wipers and washer ...................................... 172 Horn ............................................ 153 Headlight cleaner switch ...... 176 2-2. Instrument cluster Gauges and meters................ 154 Indicators and warning lights ......................................... 158 Multi-information display...... 161 2-4. Using other driving systems Cruise control........................... 177 Dynamic radar cruise control ...................................... 181 Intuitive parking assist........... 195 Driving assist systems............ 201 PCS (Pre-Collision System) ...... 207 2-5. Driving information Cargo and luggage ................ 214 Vehicle load limits................... 217 Winter driving tips.................. 218 Trailer towing .......................... 220 Dinghy towing.......................... 221 127 2-1. Driving procedures Driving the vehicle The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving. ■ Starting the engine (P. 138) ■ Driving STEP 1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (P. 142) STEP 2 Release the parking brake. (P. 152) STEP 3 Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle. ■ Stopping STEP 1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal. STEP 2 If necessary, set the parking brake. When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P or N. (P. 142) ■ Parking the vehicle STEP 1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal. STEP 2 Set the parking brake. (P. 152) STEP 3 Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 142) STEP 4 Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to stop the engine. STEP 5 Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your person. Starting on a steep uphill STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 128 Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to D. Gently depress the accelerator pedal. Release the parking brake. 2-1. Driving procedures ■ Starting off on a hill Hill-start assist control will operate. (P. 201) ■ Driving in the rain ● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery. ● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery. ● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because ■ Engine speed while driving In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving. This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration. ● The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill ● When the accelerator pedal is released ● With the F-sport mode total control switch activated, when the brake pedal is depressed ■ Breaking in your new Lexus To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to observe: ● For the first 186 miles (300 km): Avoid sudden stops. ● For the first 621 miles (1000 km): • • • • Do not drive at extremely high speeds. Avoid sudden acceleration. Do not drive continuously in the low gears. Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods. 129 When driving there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly. 2 2-1. Driving procedures ■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding down. ■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (P. 521) CAUTION ■ When starting off To prevent the vehicle from creeping forward, keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when shifting the shift lever. ■ When driving the vehicle ● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal. • Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury. • When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly. • Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly. • Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident. ● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials. ● Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R. Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle. 130 2-1. Driving procedures CAUTION ● If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check that the trunk is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. ● Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control. ● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control. ● Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is selected. ● During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way: P. 515 ● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill. Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (P. 145, 147) ● When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing an accident. ● Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving. Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may result in death or serious injury. ● Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their bodies are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury. 131 When driving ● Do not shift the shift lever to D while the vehicle is moving backward. 2 2-1. Driving procedures CAUTION ● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds. ■ When driving on slippery road surfaces ● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident. ● Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-shifting or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident. ● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident. ■ When shifting the shift lever Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury. ■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators) Have your Lexus dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as possible. Rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed. Moderate levels of brake pad and disc wear allow enhanced front braking power. As a result, the discs may wear more quickly than conventional brake discs. Therefore, when replacing the brake pads, Lexus recommends that you also have the thickness of the discs measured. It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded. 132 2-1. Driving procedures CAUTION ■ When the vehicle is stopped ● Do not race the engine. If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident. ● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time. If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior. 2 ● In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep ● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed. ● Avoid revving or racing the engine. Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby. 133 When driving depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary. 2-1. Driving procedures CAUTION ■ When the vehicle is parked ● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun. Doing so may result in the following. • Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire. • The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of eye glasses to deform or crack. • Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components. ● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock the vehicle. Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running. ● Do not touch the exhaust pipes or rear bumper exhaust diffusers while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off. Doing so may cause burns. ● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard. ■ Exhaust gases Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard. ● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard. ● The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer. Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. 134 2-1. Driving procedures CAUTION ■ When taking a nap in the vehicle Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard. ■ When braking the vehicle 2 ● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously. ● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking. In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the pedal than usual. Braking distance may also increase. ● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls. Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes. ● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: if one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes longer. Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed immediately. 135 When driving Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle. 2-1. Driving procedures NOTICE ■ When driving the vehicle ● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, as this may restrain driving torque. ● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals together to hold the vehicle on a hill. ■ When parking the vehicle Always put the shift lever in P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed. ■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts ● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an extended period of time. Doing so may damage the power steering motor. ● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc. ■ If you get a flat tire while driving A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle. ● It may be difficult to control your vehicle. ● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds. ● The vehicle will behave abnormally. Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (P. 495) 136 2-1. Driving procedures NOTICE ■ When encountering flooded roads Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle. ● Engine stalling ● Short in electrical components ● Engine damage caused by water immersion ● Brake function ● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission, differential, etc. ● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc. 137 2 When driving In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Lexus dealer check the following. 2-1. Driving procedures Engine (ignition) switch Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your person starts the engine or changes “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes. ■ Starting the engine STEP 1 Check that the parking brake is set. STEP 2 Check that the shift lever is set in P. STEP 3 Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal. The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns green. STEP 4 Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. The engine can be started from any “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode. 138 2-1. Driving procedures ■ Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode Modes can be changed by pressing the “ENGINE START STOP” switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.) OFF* The emergency flashers can be used. 2 ACCESSORY mode When driving Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used. The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns amber. IGNITION ON mode All electrical components can be used. The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns amber. *: If the shift lever is in a position other than P when turning off the engine, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will be turned to ACCESSORY mode, not to OFF. 139 2-1. Driving procedures ■ If the engine does not start The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 88) ■ When the steering lock cannot be released The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator will flash in green and a message will be shown on the multi-information display. Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch again while turning the steering wheel left and right. ■ When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator flashes in amber The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. ■ Auto power off function If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes with the shift lever in P, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically turn OFF. ■ Electronic key battery depletion P. 38 ■ When the electronic key battery is discharged P. 436 ■ Conditions affecting operation P. 36 ■ Note for the entry function P. 39 140 2-1. Driving procedures CAUTION ■ When starting the engine Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not press the accelerator while starting the engine under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ■ Stopping the engine in an emergency NOTICE ■ To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods without the engine running. ■ When starting the engine ● Do not race a cold engine. ● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine checked immediately. 141 2 When driving If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. (P. 515) However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. 2-1. Driving procedures Automatic transmission Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions. ■ Shifting the shift lever and selecting a shift position While the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever. Shift position Function P Parking the vehicle/ starting the engine R Reversing N Neutral D Normal driving* M M mode driving (P. 147) *: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the D position for normal driving. 142 2-1. Driving procedures ■ Shift position uses Shift position Display Purpose Normal D position driving Gears between 1 and 8 are automatically selected according to driving conditions Shift range selection (P. 145) Allows optimum use of engine braking 2 When driving (paddle shift switches activated) Function Allows the Individual gear driver to select selection gears for (P. 147) sporty driving 143 2-1. Driving procedures ■ Selecting a driving mode The following modes can be selected to suit driving conditions: Snow mode For accelerating and driving on slippery road surfaces, such as on snow. “Sport” mode (P. 203) To cancel a mode, press the same switch again. 144 2-1. Driving procedures Selecting shift ranges in the D position To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the “-”paddle shift switch. The shift range can then be selected by operating the “-” and “+” paddle shift switches. Changing the shift range allows restriction of the highest gear, preventing unnecessary upshifting and enabling the level of engine braking force to be selected. To return to normal D position driving, the “+” paddle shift switch must be held down for a period of time. 145 2 When driving Higher shift range Lower shift range The selected shift range, from 1 to 8, will be displayed in the meter cluster. 2-1. Driving procedures ■ Shift ranges and their functions Meter cluster display* Function 8 Gears between 1 and 8 are automatically selected according to vehicle speed and driving conditions 7 Gears between 1 and 7 are automatically selected according to vehicle speed and driving conditions 6 Gears between 1 and 6 are automatically selected according to vehicle speed and driving conditions 5 Gears between 1 and 5 are automatically selected according to vehicle speed and driving conditions 4 Gears between 1 and 4 are automatically selected according to vehicle speed and driving conditions 3 Gears between 1 and 3 are automatically selected according to vehicle speed and driving conditions 2 Gears between 1 and 2 are automatically selected according to vehicle speed and driving conditions 1 The gear is set at 1 *: “D” is also displayed to indicate the shift position. A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a higher shift range. 146 2-1. Driving procedures Selecting gears in the M position To enter M mode, shift the shift lever to the M position. Gears can then be selected by operating the shift lever or paddle shift switches, allowing you to drive in the gear of your choosing. The selected gear, from 1 to 8, will be displayed in the meter cluster. When in the M position, the gear will not change unless the shift lever or paddle shift switches are operated. However, even when in the M position, the gears will be automatically changed in the following situations: ● When vehicle speed drops (downshift only). ● When the automatic transmission fluid or engine coolant temperature is low. 147 2 When driving Upshifting Downshifting The gear changes once every time the shift lever or paddle shift switch is operated. 2-1. Driving procedures ■ Gear functions Meter cluster display* Function 8 The gear is fixed at 8th gear 7 The gear is fixed at 7th gear 6 The gear is fixed at 6th gear 5 The gear is fixed at 5th gear 4 The gear is fixed at 4th gear 3 The gear is fixed at 3rd gear 2 The gear is fixed at 2nd gear 1 The gear is fixed at 1st gear *: “M” is also displayed to indicate the shift position. ■ When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated in the D position ● When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated in the D position, a shift range will be automatically selected. The highest gear of the first shift range will be one gear lower than the gear in use during normal D position driving. ● If the “-” paddle shift switch is operated when a shift range is selected while in the D position, the shift range may be lowered by two ranges or more in accordance with the driving conditions. ■ Automatic deactivation of shift range selection in the D position Shift range selection in the D position will be deactivated in the following situations: ● When the vehicle comes to a stop ● If the accelerator pedal is depressed for more than a certain period of time in one shift range 148 2-1. Driving procedures ■ Rev indicator ● When the shift lever is in D (paddle shift switches operated) or in M, an indicator on the tachometer illuminates in 3 steps in the case of high engine speeds to encourage the driver to upshift. ● If the third (red) segment illuminates, a buzzer will also sound. 2 ■ Downshift restrictions warning buzzer ■ When driving with the cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control Engine braking will not occur during shift range selection in the D position, even when downshifting to range 7, 6, 5 or 4. (P. 177, 181) ■ Automatic deactivation of snow mode and “Sport” mode If the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned OFF after driving in either snow mode or “Sport” mode, the mode is automatically deactivated. ■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P P. 503 149 When driving To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the shift lever or paddle shift switch is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.) 2-1. Driving procedures ■ Automatic gear selection when the vehicle is stopped ● When the vehicle comes to a stop, the transmission will automatically downshift to allow you to start off in 1st gear. ● When the vehicle is idling at high rpm in order to warm up, and the vehicle is on a slippery road, the transmission will automatically shift to 2nd gear for stopping and starting off. ■ If the automatic transmission fluid temperature warning message is displayed If the automatic transmission fluid temperature warning message is displayed while driving, make sure you return to normal D position driving and reduce speed by easing off the accelerator pedal. Stop the vehicle in a safe place, shift the shift lever to the P position and let the engine idle until the warning message goes out. When the warning message goes out, the vehicle can be driven again. If the warning message does not go out after waiting a while, have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ■ AI-SHIFT The AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver performance and driving conditions. The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. However, operating the “-” paddle shift switch will restrict the function’s operation. (Shifting the shift lever to the M position cancels the function.) CAUTION ■ When driving on slippery road surfaces Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning. 150 2-1. Driving procedures Turn signal lever Right turn Left turn Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change The right hand signal will flash until you release the lever. Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change 2 When driving The left hand signal will flash until you release the lever. ■ Turn signals can be operated when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ If the indicators flash faster than usual Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out. 151 2-1. Driving procedures Parking brake Sets the parking brake* (Depressing the pedal again releases the parking brake.) *: Fully depress the parking brake pedal with your left foot while depressing the brake pedal with your right foot. Canada U.S.A. ■ Usage in winter time See “Winter driving tips” for parking brake usage in winter time. (P. 218) NOTICE ■ Before driving Fully release the parking brake. Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear. 152 2-1. Driving procedures Horn To sound the horn, press on or close to the mark. 2 When driving 153 2-2. Instrument cluster Gauges and meters The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may differ depending on the model/type. The following gauges, meters and display illuminate when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. Engine coolant temperature gauge Displays the engine coolant temperature. If the temperature is too high, the display will flash. Engine oil temperature gauge Displays the engine oil temperature. If the temperature is too high, the display will flash. Odometer and trip meter Odometer: Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven. Trip meter: Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different distances independently. Multi-information display P. 161 154 2-2. Instrument cluster Tachometer Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute. Shift position and shift range/gear display Displays the shift position along with the currently selected shift range or gear. (P. 145, 147) Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and holding the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being displayed. 2 When driving Speedometers Display the vehicle speed. Fuel gauge Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank. 155 2-2. Instrument cluster Instrument panel light control The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted. Darker Brighter ■ Changing units for the digital speedometer Units for the digital speedometer can be changed between km/h and mph by pushing and holding the odometer/trip meter reset button while the odometer is displayed. At this time, all the units for the multi-information display will also change. 156 2-2. Instrument cluster CAUTION ■ When the temperature of the display is extremely low Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the shift position and shift range/gear display. At extremely low temperatures, the display may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed. For example, there is a lag between the driver’s downshifting and the new gear number appearing on the display. In this case, wait until the display changes and take care not to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components ● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates the maximum engine speed. ● The following may indicate that the engine is overheating. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place. (P. 511) • The display on the engine coolant temperature gauge flashes • The display on the engine oil temperature gauge flashes 157 When driving NOTICE 2 2-2. Instrument cluster Indicators and warning lights The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems. Instrument cluster The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may differ depending on the model/type. Center panel 158 2-2. Instrument cluster ■ Indicators The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems. (Canada) Cruise control indicator (P. 177, 181) Headlight high beam indicator (P. 168) Intuitive parking assist indicator (P. 195) (if equipped) *1, 2 Headlight indicator (P. 166) 2 When driving (U.S.A.) Turn signal indicator (P. 151) Slip indicator (P. 202) Tail light indicator (P. 166) *1 VSC off indicator Front fog light indicator (P. 170) *1 “TRAC OFF” indicator “SNOW” indicator (P. 144) *1 SRS airbag on-off indica- (P. 202) (P. 202) tor (P. 108) *1, 3 “SPORT” indicator (P. 144, 203) Pre-collision system warning light (P. 207) (if equipped) *1: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. *2: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating. *3: The light flashes when the system is turned off. The light flashes quickly to indicate that the system is operating. 159 2-2. Instrument cluster ■ Warning lights Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle’s systems. (P. 469) * * * (U.S.A.) * * (Canada) * (U.S.A.) * * (Canada) (Canada) * * * (U.S.A.) (if equipped) * (for driver) (for front passenger) * *: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. CAUTION ■ If a safety system warning light does not come on Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs. 160 2-2. Instrument cluster Multi-information display The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of drivingrelated data, including the current outside air temperature. ● Trip information (P. 162) Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruisingrelated information. ● Satellite switch mode display (P. 348) 2 When driving This switch is used to configure various function settings. ● Intuitive parking assist display (if equipped) (P. 195) Automatically displayed when using intuitive parking assist. ● Dynamic radar cruise control display (if equipped) (P. 181) Automatically displayed when using dynamic radar cruise control. ● Warning messages (P. 479) Automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in one of the vehicle’s systems. 161 2-2. Instrument cluster Trip information Display items can be switched by pushing the “DISP” switch. ■ Outside temperature Displays the outside air temperature. The temperature range that can be displayed is from -40F (-40C) to 122F (50C). When the temperature drops to 37F (3C), the digits of the display will flash for 10 seconds. ■ Driving range Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining. • This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed. • When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated. When refueling, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off, the display may not be updated. 162 2-2. Instrument cluster ■ Average fuel consumption Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset. • The function can be reset by pushing the “DISP” switch for longer than one second when the average fuel consumption is displayed. • Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference. 2 ■ Average fuel consumption after refueling Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference. ■ Current fuel consumption Displays the current rate of fuel consumption. ■ Average vehicle speed Displays the average vehicle speed since the engine was started or the function was reset. The function can be reset by pushing the “DISP” switch for longer than one second when the average vehicle speed is displayed. 163 When driving Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was last refueled. 2-2. Instrument cluster ■ Gear position display Indicates the current gear, and the range of gears that is available when the shift lever is in the D position. The gear range is shown by the number of dots () and the current gear is shown as a number. The transmission automatically selects the gears within the driver selected gear range. In the illustration to the left, a range of 8 available gears (1 through 8) has been selected by the driver. (The shift lever is in the D position with 8 ranges enabled) It is possible for the transmission to automatically select between all 8 of the gears. In this case, the transmission has selected third gear. When in the M position, the “F” mark is displayed. ■ Outside temperature display In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change. ● When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h]) ● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.) ■ Changing units for the multi-information display P. 156 164 2-2. Instrument cluster CAUTION ■ The information display at low temperatures Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed. For example, there is a lag between the driver's downshifting and the new gear number appearing on the display. In this case, wait until the display changes and take care not to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or serious injury. 2 When driving 165 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Headlight switch The headlights can be operated manually or automatically. Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows: Type A The daytime running lights turn on. The side marker, tail, license plate, daytime running lights and instrument panel lights turn on. The headlights and all lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on. The headlights, parking lights/daytime running lights and other lights turn on and off automatically. (When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode) 166 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Type B The daytime running lights turn on. The side marker, tail, license plate, daytime running lights and instrument panel lights turn on. The headlights and all lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on. The headlights, parking lights/daytime running lights and other lights turn on and off automatically. (When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode) 2 When driving 167 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Turning on the high beam headlights With the headlights on, push the lever forward to turn on the high beams. Pull the lever back to the center position to turn the high beams off. Pull the lever toward you to turn on the high beams. Release to turn them off. You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off. ■ Daytime running light system ● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the parking light turn on automatically (at a increased intensity) whenever the engine is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night. ● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy. ■ Headlight control sensor The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield. Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction. 168 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers ■ Automatic light off system ● When the headlights come on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after a door is opened and closed if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch has been switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. (The lights turn off immediately if on the key is pressed after all doors are locked.) ● When only the tail lights come on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF and driver’s door is opened. To turn the lights on again, switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the light switch or . off once and then back to The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users. ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 544) NOTICE ■ To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running. 169 When driving ■ Automatic headlight leveling system 2 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Fog light switch The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are on low beam. Type A Front fog lights off Front fog lights on 170 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Type B Front fog lights off Front fog lights on 2 When driving 171 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Windshield wipers and washer With “AUTO” selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume. Type A Rain-sensing wiper operation Low speed wiper operation High speed wiper operation Temporary operation 172 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Type B Rain-sensing wiper operation Low speed wiper operation High speed wiper operation Temporary operation 2 When driving Washer/wiper dual operation Wipers operate automatically. (After operating several times, the wipers operate one more time after a short delay to prevent dripping.) 173 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers ■ The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation With the settings other than “AUTO” also, the time until drip prevention wiper sweep occurs is changed depending on vehicle speed. Low speed wiper operation selected, wiper operation will be switched from low speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary. ■ “AUTO” mode ● The raindrop sensor judges the amount of raindrops. ● The sensitivity of sensor can be adjusted by turning the knob. Increases the sensitivity Decreases the sensitivity ● If the wiper switch is turned to the “AUTO” position while the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the wiper will operate once to show that auto mode is activated. ● If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 194F (90C) or higher, or -22F (-30C) or lower, automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate the wipers in any mode other than “AUTO”. ■ Outside rear view mirror defogger activation linked to windshield wiper operation The outside rear view mirror defogger automatically turns on when you operate the windshield wipers. 174 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers ■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir. ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Settings (e.g. drip prevention function) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 544) CAUTION 2 ■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in “AUTO” mode NOTICE ■ When the windshield is dry Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield. ■ When a nozzle becomes blocked Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged. ■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and held continually. 175 When driving The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the windshield is subject to vibration in “AUTO” mode. Take care that your fingers etc. do not become caught in the windshield wipers. 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Headlight cleaner switch Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights. Press the switch to clean the headlights. ■ The headlight cleaner can be operated when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the headlight switch is turned on. ■ Windshield washer linked operation Only for the first time when the windshield washer is operated after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode with the headlights on, the headlight cleaners will also operate once. (P. 172) NOTICE ■ When the washer fluid tank is empty Do not use this function when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause the washer fluid pump to overheat. : If equipped 176 2-4. Using other driving systems Cruise control Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the accelerator pedal. Indicator Cruise control switch 2 When driving ■ Setting the vehicle speed STEP 1 Press the “ON-OFF” button to activate the cruise control. Cruise control indicator will come on. Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control. STEP 2 Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, and push the lever down to set the speed. The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed. : If equipped 177 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Adjusting the set speed To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is obtained. Increases the speed Decreases the speed Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the lever in the desired direction. Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the desired direction. The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows: Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated. Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released. ■ Canceling and resuming the constant speed control Pulling the lever toward you cancels the constant speed control. The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied. Pushing the lever up resumes the constant speed control. Resuming is available when the vehicle speed is more than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). 178 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Cruise control can be set when ● The shift lever is in D. ● Range 4 or higher of D has been selected by using the paddle shift. ● Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). ■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed ● The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes. ● Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by ■ Automatic cruise control cancelation Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations. ● Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed. At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained. ● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). ● VSC is activated. ■ If the cruise control indicator light flashes Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system. If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. 179 When driving first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever down to set the new speed. 2 2-4. Using other driving systems CAUTION ■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use. ■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations. Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ● In heavy traffic ● On roads with sharp bends ● On winding roads ● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow ● On steep hills Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill. 180 2-4. Using other driving systems Dynamic radar cruise control Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates in order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead. Indicator Display Set speed Distance switch Cruise control switch 2 When driving : If equipped 181 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode) STEP 1 Press the “ON-OFF” button to activate the cruise control. Cruise control indicator will come on. Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control. STEP 2 Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, and push the lever down to set the speed. The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed. 182 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Adjusting the set speed To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is displayed. Increases the speed Decreases the speed Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the lever in the desired direction. 2 When driving Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the desired direction. In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be increased or decreased as follows: • When the set speed is shown in “MPH” Fine adjustment: By approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) each time the lever is operated Large adjustment: By approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) for each 0.75 seconds the lever is held • When the set speed is shown in “km/h” Fine adjustment: By approximately 3.1 mph (5 km/h) each time the lever is operated Large adjustment: By approximately 3.1 mph (5 km/h) for each 0.75 seconds the lever is held In the constant speed control mode (P.188), the set speed will be increased or decreased as follows: Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released. 183 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance Preceding vehicle mark Pressing the button changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance as follows: Long Medium Short The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is set automatically to long mode when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode. If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the preceding vehicle mark will also be displayed. ■ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed. 184 Distance options Vehicle-to-vehicle distance Long Approximately 210 ft. (65 m) Medium Approximately 150 ft. (45 m) Short Approximately 100 ft. (30 m) 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Canceling and resuming the speed control Pulling the lever toward you cancels the cruise control. The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied. Pushing the lever up resumes the cruise control and returns vehicle speed to the set speed. 2 When driving Resuming is available when the vehicle speed is more than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). 185 2-4. Using other driving systems Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up to approximately 400 ft. (120 m) ahead, determines the current vehicleto-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle ahead. Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long downhill slopes. Example of constant speed cruising When there are no vehicles ahead The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. Example of deceleration cruising When the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead. 186 2-4. Using other driving systems Example of follow-up cruising When following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver. Example of acceleration When there are no longer any vehicles ahead driving slower than the set speed The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to constant speed cruising. When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will flash and buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a vehicle. Apply the brakes to ensure an appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle distance. ■ Warnings may not occur when In the following instances, there is a possibility that the warnings will not occur: ● When the speed of the vehicle ahead matches or exceeds your vehicle speed ● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely slow speed ● Immediately after the cruise control speed was set ● At the instant the accelerator is applied 187 When driving Approach warning 2 2-4. Using other driving systems Selecting conventional constant speed control mode Constant speed control mode differs from vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode. When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set speed regardless of whether or not there are other vehicles in the lane ahead. Press the “ON-OFF” button to activate the cruise control. Cruise control indicator will come on. Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control. Switch to constant speed control mode. (Push the lever forward and hold for approximately one second.) When in constant speed control mode, to return to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, push the lever forward again and hold for approximately 1 second. After the desired speed has been set, it is not possible to return to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode. If the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off and then turned to IGNITION ON mode again, the vehicle will automatically return to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode. 188 2-4. Using other driving systems Adjusting the speed setting: P. 183 Canceling and resuming the speed setting: P. 185 ■ Dynamic radar cruise control can be set when ● The shift lever is in D. ● Range 4 or higher of D has been selected by using the paddle shift. 2 ● Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h). The vehicle can accelerate normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the vehicle ahead. ■ Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following situations: ● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). ● VSC is activated. ● The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way. ● The windshield wipers are operating at high speed (when the wiper switch is set to the “AUTO” mode or the high speed wiper operation position). ● When snow mode is set. If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer. 189 When driving ■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Automatic cancelation of constant speed control The cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in the following situations: ● Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set vehicle speed. At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained. ● Vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). ● VSC is activated. ■ Radar sensor and grille cover Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice and plastic objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.) Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected. Grille cover Radar sensor ■ Warning lights, messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control Warning lights, messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. (P. 479) 190 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Certification For vehicles sold in U.S.A. FCC ID: HYQDNMWR005 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. For vehicles sold in Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 191 When driving Radio frequency radiation exposure Information: 2 2-4. Using other driving systems CAUTION ■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. Be aware of the set speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes etc. ■ Cautions regarding the driving assist systems Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ● Assisting the driver to measure following distance The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in determining the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings. ● Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead is appropriate or not. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation. ● Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle The dynamic radar cruise control has no capability to prevent or avoid a collision with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any danger, the driver must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in order to ensure the safety of all involved. ■ To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use. 192 2-4. Using other driving systems CAUTION ■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations. Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ● In heavy traffic ● On roads with sharp bends 2 ● On winding roads ● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill. ● At entrances to expressways ● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.) ● When an approach warning buzzer is heard often ■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in front of you. As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the approach warning (P. 187) will not be activated, and a fatal or serious accident may result. ● Vehicles that cut in suddenly ● Vehicles traveling at low speeds ● Vehicles that are not moving ● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.) ● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane 193 When driving ● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice and snow 2-4. Using other driving systems CAUTION ■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function correctly Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and a fatal or serious accident may result: ● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the functioning of the sensor ● When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the trunk etc.) ● When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow ● When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable ● When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly ■ Handling the radar sensor Observe the following to ensure the cruise control system can function effectively. Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident. ● Keep the sensor and grille cover clean at all times. Clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them. ● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact. If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer. ● Do not disassemble the sensor. ● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding area. ● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille. ● Do not replace them with non-genuine parts. 194 2-4. Using other driving systems Intuitive parking assist The distance to obstacles measured by the sensors is communicated via the multi-information display and a buzzer when parallel parking or maneuvering into a garage. Always check the surrounding area when using this system. For vehicles equipped with a navigation system, refer to the separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual” for further details. ■ Types of sensors 2 When driving Front corner sensors Rear corner sensors Rear center sensors ■ Multi-information display (P. 161) Front corner sensor operation Rear corner sensor operation Rear center sensor operation : If equipped 195 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Switching the intuitive parking assist on (P. 348) When on, an indicator is displayed to inform the driver that the function is operational. The distance display and buzzer When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds. ■ Front corner sensors Multi-information display 196 Approximate distance to obstacle Buzzer 1.6 to 1.3 ft. (50 to 40cm) Medium 1.3 to 1.0 ft. (40 to 30cm) Fast 1.0 ft. (30cm) or less Continuous 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Rear corner sensors Multi-information display Buzzer 1.6 to 1.2 ft. (50 to 37.5 cm) Medium 1.2 to 0.8 ft. (37.5 to 25 cm) Fast 0.8 ft. (25cm) or less Continuous Approximate distance to obstacle Buzzer 4.9 to 2.0 ft. (150 to 60cm) Slow 2.0 to 1.5 ft. (60 to 45cm) Medium 1.5 to 1.1 ft. (45 to 35cm) Fast 1.1 ft. (35cm) or less Continuous 2 When driving Approximate distance to obstacle ■ Rear center sensors Multi-information display 197 2-4. Using other driving systems Detection range of the sensors Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot detect obstacles that are extremely close to the vehicle. The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object etc. 198 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Sensor detection information ● Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of the sensor to correctly detect obstacles. Particular instances where this may occur are listed below. • • • • • • ● The shape of the obstacle may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particular attention to the following obstacles. • • • • • Wires, fences, ropes etc. Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb radio waves Sharply-angled objects Low obstacles Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle ■ If the display flashes and a message is displayed P. 479 199 2 When driving There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor. The sensor is frozen. The sensor is covered in any way. The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side. On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves. • There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity. • The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain. • The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna. • A towing eyelet is installed. • The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact. • The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb. • In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their shapes, signs and other objects may be judged by the sensor to be closer than they are. 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Certification For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For vehicles sold in Canada This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001. Cet appareil ISM est conforme à la norme NMB-001 du Canada. ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Settings (e.g. buzzer volume) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 544) CAUTION ■ Caution when using the intuitive parking assist Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident. ● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h). ● Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range. NOTICE ■ Notes when washing the vehicle Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area. Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning. 200 2-4. Using other driving systems Driving assist systems To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle. ■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface. 2 ■ Brake assist When driving Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation. ■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces. ■ TRAC (Traction Control) Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the rear wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads. ■ Hill-start assist control Helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting on an incline or slippery slope. ■ EPS (Electric Power Steering) Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel. ■ VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management) Provides integrated control of the ABS, brake assist, TRAC, VSC, hill-start assist control, and EPS systems. Helps to maintain vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling the brakes, engine output and steering assist. When the F-sport mode total control switch is pressed, “Sport” mode is activated. (P. 203) ■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped) P. 207 201 2-4. Using other driving systems When the VSC/TRAC/hill-start assist control systems are operating The slip indicator light flashes to indicate that the VSC/TRAC/hillstart assist control systems have been engaged. The stop lights and high mounted stoplight turn on when the hill-start assist control system is operating. To disable TRAC and/or VSC If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC and VSC may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it. ■ Turning off TRAC Quickly push and release the switch to turn off TRAC. The “TRAC OFF” indicator light should come on. Push the switch again to turn the system back on. 202 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Turning off TRAC and VSC To turn the TRAC and VSC systems off, press and hold the switch for 3 seconds or more while the vehicle is stopped. The “TRAC OFF” indicator light and VSC off indicator light should come on. Push the switch again to turn the system back on. Your vehicle is equipped with two types of control modes to accommodate various driving preferences. The control modes can be selected with the F-sport mode total control switch. Normal mode allows secure and smooth normal driving. When the switch is pressed, “Sport” mode is activated. Control characteristics such as the ECT, EPS, VSC and TRAC are adjusted to afford maneuverability closer to what a driver may have imagined, while a sense of security is retained. “Sport” mode/Normal mode The “SPORT” indicator comes on when in “Sport” mode. 203 When driving F-sport mode total control switch 2 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ When the “TRAC OFF” indicator light comes on even if the VSC off switch has not been pressed TRAC and hill-start assist control cannot be operated. Contact your Lexus dealer. ■ Automatic reactivation of the TRAC/VSC systems If the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off, re-starting the engine will automatically reactivate them. ■ Automatic TRAC reactivation If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when vehicle speed increases. ■ Automatic TRAC and VSC reactivation If the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on even when vehicle speed increases. ■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC, TRAC and hill-start assist control systems ● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment if the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems. ● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred. • • • • Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering. A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop. The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is activated. The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated. ■ Hill-start assist control is operational when ● The shift lever is in the D or M position. ● The brake pedal is not depressed. ● The system has detected that the vehicle is moving backward. ■ EPS operation sound When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction. 204 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes. ■ Automatic deactivation of “Sport” mode When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off after driving in “Sport” mode, the mode is automatically deactivated. 2 ■ If the slip indicator comes on CAUTION ■ The ABS does not operate effectively when ● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as excessively worn tires on a snow covered road). ● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick road. ■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following situations. ● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads ● When driving over bumps in the road ● When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven roads ■ TRAC may not operate effectively when Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating. Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost. 205 When driving It may indicate a malfunction in the VSC, TRAC or hill-start assist control system. Contact your Lexus dealer. 2-4. Using other driving systems CAUTION ■ If the hill-start assist control does not operate effectively Do not overly rely on the hill-start assist control. The hill-start assist control may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered in ice. ■ When the VSC is activated The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes. ■ When TRAC and VSC are off Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are systems to help enhance vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn off TRAC and VSC unless necessary. ■ Replacing tires Make sure that all tires are of the designated size and total load capacity, and of the same brand and tread pattern. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire pressure level. The ABS, VSC and TRAC systems will not function correctly if different tires are fitted on the vehicle. Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels. ■ Handling of tires and suspension Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction. 206 2-4. Using other driving systems PCS (Pre-Collision System) When the radar sensor detects possibility of a frontal collision, the precollision system such as the brakes and seat belts are automatically engaged to lessen impact as well as vehicle damage. ■ Pre-collision seat belts If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the precollision system will retract the seat belt before the collision occurs. The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or loses control of the vehicle. (P. 67) ■ Pre-collision brake assist When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed. ■ Pre-collision braking When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system warns the driver using a warning light, warning display and buzzer. If the system determines that a collision is unavoidable, the brakes are automatically applied to reduce the collision speed. The pre-collision braking function can be turned on and off using the satellite switch. Radar sensor Detects vehicles or other obstacles on or near the road ahead and determines whether a collision is imminent based on the position, speed, and heading of the obstacles. Grille cover Radar sensor : If equipped 207 When driving However, the system will not operate in the event of skidding when the VSC system are disabled. 2 2-4. Using other driving systems Disabling the pre-collision braking The pre-collision braking function can be turned on and off using the satellite switch. (P. 348) Press “” or “” to display the “PCS BRAKE” setting ( ). Then, press the “ON/OFF” button in the middle of the switch to select either “ON” or “OFF” ( ). It may take approximately 3 seconds for the display to change after the satellite switch is operated. The pre-collision system warning light flashes when “OFF” is selected. ■ Obstacles not detected The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as pylons. There may also be occasions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcycles, trees, or snowdrifts. 208 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ The pre-collision system is operational when ● Pre-collision seat belts (type A): • Vehicle speed is above 4 mph (5 km/h). • The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h). • The front occupants are wearing a seat belt. ● Pre-collision seat belts (type B): • Vehicle speed exceeds 19 mph (30 km/h). • The system detects sudden braking or skidding. • The front occupants are wearing a seat belt. ● Pre-collision brake assist 2 • The pre-collision braking function is activated. • Vehicle speed is above 10 mph (15 km/h). • The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle is greater than 10 mph (15 km/h). ■ Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no possibility of collision ● When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve ● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve ● When driving over a narrow iron bridge ● When there is a metal object on the road surface ● When driving on an uneven road surface ● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn ● When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front ● When a grade separation/interchange, sign, billboard, or other structure appears to be directly in the vehicle's line of travel. ● When an overhead billboard or other metallic structure appears to be in the vehicle’s direct line of travel due to driving on a hill. 209 When driving • Vehicle speed is above 19 mph (30 km/h). • The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle is greater than 19 to 25 mph (30 to 40 km/h). • The brake pedal is depressed. ● Pre-collision braking 2-4. Using other driving systems ● When an extreme change in vehicle height occurs ● When the axis of the radar is out of adjustment ● When passing through certain toll gates ● When driving on a bridge. When the system is activated in the situations described above there is also a possibility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop the vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten. ■ When there is a malfunction in the system Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 469, 479) ■ Situations in which the pre-collision system does not function properly The system may not function effectively in situations such as the following: ● On roads with sharp bends or uneven surfaces ● If a vehicle suddenly moves in front of your vehicle, such as at an intersection ● If a vehicle suddenly cuts in front of your vehicle, such as when overtaking ● In inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or sand storms ● When your vehicle is skidding with the VSC system off ● When an extreme change in vehicle height occurs ● When the axis of the radar is out of adjustment ■ Automatic cancelation of the pre-collision system When a malfunction occurs due to sensor contamination, etc. that results in the sensors being unable to detect obstacles, the pre-collision system will be automatically disabled. In this case, the system will not activate even if there is a collision possibility. 210 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Certification For vehicles sold in U.S.A. FCC ID: HYQDNMWR005 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. For vehicles sold in Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 211 When driving Radio frequency radiation exposure Information: 2 2-4. Using other driving systems CAUTION ■ Handling the radar sensor Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively. ● Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times. Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them. ● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact. If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may become inaccurate or malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area are subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer. ● Do not disassemble the sensor. ● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille guard or surrounding area. ● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille. ■ Limitations of the pre-collision system Do not rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards. Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. 212 2-4. Using other driving systems CAUTION ■ Cautions regarding the assist contents of the system By means of alarms and brake control, the pre-collision system is intended to assist the driver in avoiding collisions through the process of LOOK-JUDGE-ACT. There are limits to the degree of assistance the system can provide, so please keep in mind the following important points. ● Assisting the driver in watching the road ● Assisting the driver in making correct judgment When attempting to estimate the possibility of a collision, the only data available to the pre-collision system is that from obstacles it has detected directly in front of the vehicle. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of collision in any given situation. ● Assisting the driver in taking action The pre-collision system’s braking assist feature is designed to help reduce the severity of a collision, and so only acts when the system has judged that a collision is unavoidable. This system by itself is not capable of automatically avoiding a collision or bringing the vehicle to a stop safely. For this reason, when encountering a dangerous situation the driver must take direct and immediate action in order to ensure the safety of all involved. 213 2 When driving The pre-collision system is only able to detect obstacles directly in front of the vehicle, and only within a limited range. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for the driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings. 2-5. Driving information Cargo and luggage Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load. ● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible. Be sure all items are secured in place. ● Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance. ● For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight. Capacity and distribution Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants. (Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants) Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit  (1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. (2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400  750 (5150) = 650 lbs.) (5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 214 2-5. Driving information (6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing. Calculation formula for your vehicle 2 When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows: B*2 lb. (kg) - A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb. (kg) *1: A =Weight of people *2: B =Total load capacity *3: C =Available cargo and luggage load In this condition, if 2 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows: C lb. (kg) - D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb. (kg) *4: D =Additional weight of people *5: E =Available cargo and luggage load 215 When driving Cargo capacity Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) (P. 518) 2-5. Driving information As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle. CAUTION ■ Things that must not be carried in the trunk The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk. ● Receptacles containing gasoline ● Aerosol cans ■ Storage precautions Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the item may get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent pedals from being depressed properly, block the driver's vision, or hit the driver or passengers, causing an accident. • At the feet of the driver • On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items) • Package tray (behind the rear seatback) • Instrument panel • Dashboard ● Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. ■ Luggage capacity and distribution Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so will not only put load on the tires, but also reduce steering and braking performance. This could lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or even death. ● Do not overload the vehicle. ● Do not apply load to the vehicle unevenly. 216 2-5. Driving information Vehicle load limits Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. ■ Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): (P. 518) Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage. ■ Seating capacity: 4 occupants (Front 2, Rear 2) Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person. 2 When driving ■ Towing capacity Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. ■ Cargo capacity Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants. ■ Total load capacity and seating capacity These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (P. 428) CAUTION ■ Overloading the vehicle Do not overload the vehicle. It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident. 217 2-5. Driving information Winter driving tips Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions. ■ Pre-winter preparations ● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures. • Engine oil • Engine coolant • Washer fluid ● Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of battery electrolyte. ● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires. Ensure that all tires are the specified size and the same brand. ■ Before driving the vehicle Perform the following according to the driving conditions. ● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing. ● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield. ● Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis. ● Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes. 218 2-5. Driving information ■ When driving the vehicle Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions. ■ When parking the vehicle Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvertent sliding or creeping. 2 When driving CAUTION ■ Driving with snow tires Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury. ● Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle. ● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure. ● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used. ● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels. NOTICE ■ Driving with tire chains Do not fit tire chains. Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance. ■ Repairing or replacing snow tires Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire retailers. This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning system. 219 2-5. Driving information Trailer towing Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your Lexus is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers. 220 2-5. Driving information Dinghy towing Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home. 2 When driving NOTICE ■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground. 221 Interior features 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Automatic air conditioning system ..................................... 224 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers ............................. 232 Windshield wiper de-icer ................................... 233 3-2. Using the audio system Audio system type.................. 234 Using the radio........................ 237 Using the CD player ............. 245 Playing back MP3 and WMA discs............................ 252 Operating an iPod ................. 260 Operating a USB memory .................................. 268 Optimal use of the audio system ..................................... 277 Using the AUX port .............. 279 Using the steering wheel audio switches ....................... 281 222 3 3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system Bluetooth® audio system .... 284 Using the Bluetooth® audio system......................... 287 Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player ... 292 Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player ... 296 Bluetooth® audio system setup ....................................... 302 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Hands-free system for mobile phones...................... 303 Using the hands-free system (for mobile phones) ............ 307 Making a phone call............... 315 Setting a mobile phone ......... 319 Security and system setup ....................................... 324 Using the phone book .......... 328 Interior features 3-5. Using the interior lights Interior lights list..................... 334 • Interior lights ........................ 336 • Personal lights...................... 336 3-6. Using the storage features List of storage features........ 338 • Glove box ............................. 339 • Console box......................... 340 • Overhead console............... 341 • Cup holders .......................... 342 • Bottle holders/door pockets................................... 344 • Auxiliary box......................... 344 3 3-7. Other interior features Sun visors ................................. 345 Vanity mirrors ......................... 346 Clock......................................... 347 Satellite switches ................... 348 Ashtrays..................................... 351 Cigarette lighter.................... 352 Power outlet ............................ 353 Seat heaters ............................ 354 Armrest .................................... 356 Trunk storage extension ...... 357 Coat hooks .............................. 359 Assist grips............................... 360 Floor mat ................................... 361 Trunk features......................... 362 Garage door opener ............ 365 Compass ................................... 371 Safety Connect ...................... 375 223 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Automatic air conditioning system Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting. With navigation system Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”. Without navigation system Fan speed Fan speed display Off Driver’s side temperature setting display Automatic mode Airflow display Changes the air outlets used Passenger’s side temperature setting display Micro dust and pollen filter Passenger’s side temperature control Driver's side temperature control Windshield defogger Dual operation Air conditioning on/off Outside air or recirculated air mode Using the automatic mode STEP 1 Press . The air conditioning system begins to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting. STEP 2 Press to switch to automatic mode. The air conditioning system automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes. 224 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger STEP 3 Press “” on to increase the temperature and “” to decrease the temperature. The temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be set separately. Adjusting the settings ■ Adjusting the temperature setting Press “” on to increase the temperature and “” to decrease 3 the temperature. Dual mode (the indicator on is on.): The temperature for the front left-hand seat and front right-hand seat can be adjusted separately. Operating the passenger's side temperature control will enter dual mode. When the indicator on is on, the temperature of the rear seats is linked with that of the front left-hand seat. Simultaneous mode (the indicator on is off.): Only (driver’s side) can be used to adjust the temperature for all seats. ■ Adjusting the fan speed Press “” (increase) or “” (decrease) on Press . to turn the fan off. 225 Interior features The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous modes each time is pressed. 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ■ Changing the air outlets Press . The air outlets switch each time the display indicates the following. is pressed. The air flow shown on Upper body *: Automatic air flow mode only * * * * Upper body and feet Feet 226 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Feet and windshield ■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes Press . The mode switches among (recycles air inside the vehicle), “AUTO” and (introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each time the is pressed. Defogging the windshield Press . The air conditioning system operates automatically. Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to (outside air) mode when the ambient temperature is low. 227 Interior features When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning system operates automatically. 3 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Micro dust and pollen filter Press . Outside air mode switches to (recirculated air) mode. Pollen is removed from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body. Usually the system will turn off automatically after 1 or 3 minutes. To stop the operation, press again. Adjusting the sensitivity of the air intake control in automatic mode STEP 1 Press onds. STEP 2 Press “” (increase) or “” (decrease) on for 2 or more sec- . From -3 (low) to 3 (high) can be set. 228 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets Front outlets (center) Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down Turn the knob to open or close the vent Front outlets (right and left side) 3 Rear outlets Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down Turn the knob fully to the outside of the vehicle to close the vent 229 Interior features Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down Turn the knob to open or close the vent 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ■ Using the automatic mode Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur. ● Immediately after is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow. ● Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on. ■ Using the system in recirculated air mode The windows will fog up more easily if recirculated air mode is used for an extended period. ■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched in accordance with the temperature setting and the inside temperature. ■ Window defogger feature Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to ations where the windows need to be defogged. (outside air) mode in situ- ■ When outside air temperature approaches 32F (0C) The air conditioning system may not operate even when ■ When the indicator light on is pressed. flashes Press and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on once more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator light continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected by your Lexus dealer. ■ Automatic mode for air intake control In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes. ■ Micro dust and pollen filter ● In order to prevent the windshield from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the following may occur. • Outside air mode does not switch to . • The air conditioning system operates automatically. • The operation cancels after 1 minute. ● In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press 230 . 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ■ Air conditioning odors ● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents. ● To reduce potential odors from occurring: • It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off. • The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode. CAUTION 3 ■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up NOTICE ■ To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is off. 231 Interior features Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision. 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors. With navigation system Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”. Without navigation system On/off The defoggers will automatically turn off after 15 to 60 minutes. The operation time changes according to the ambient temperature and vehicle speed. ■ The defogger can be operated when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. CAUTION ■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirror, as it can become very hot and burn you. 232 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Windshield wiper de-icer This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades. On/off The windshield wiper de-icer will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes. 3 Interior features ■ The windshield wiper de-icer can be operated when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. CAUTION ■ When the windshield wiper de-icer is on The surface of the glass at the lower part and sides of the windshield become very hot. To prevent burning yourself, do not touch these areas. : If equipped 233 3-2. Using the audio system Audio system type With navigation system Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”. Without navigation system (type A) CD player with changer and AM/FM radio Without navigation system (type B) CD player with changer and AM/FM radio 234 3-2. Using the audio system Title Page Using the radio P. 237 Using the CD player P. 245 Playing back MP3 and WMA discs P. 252 Operating an iPod P. 260 Operating a USB memory P. 268 Optimal use of the audio system P. 277 Using the AUX port P. 279 Using the steering wheel audio switches P. 281 3 Interior features 235 3-2. Using the audio system ■ Using cellular phones Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating. CAUTION ■ Certification ● Part 15 of the FCC Rules FCC Warning: Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s authority to operate this device. ● Laser products • Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself. This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages. • This product utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. NOTICE ■ To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine off. ■ To avoid damaging the audio system Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system. 236 3-2. Using the audio system Using the radio Type A Seeking any traffic program station Station selector Displays radio text messages Silencing a sound 3 Power Volume Scans for receivable stations Type B Seeking any traffic program station Station selector Silencing a sound Adjusting the frequency Power Volume Seeking the frequency AM/FM mode buttons Station selector 237 Interior features Seeking the frequency AMFM/SAT mode buttons Adjusting the frequency (AM, FM mode) or channel (SAT mode) Changing the program types 3-2. Using the audio system Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio) STEP 1 “” on STEP 2 or pressing “” or Search for desired stations by turning . Press and hold the button (from be set to until you hear a beep. to ) the station is to Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio) (type A) ■ Scanning the preset radio stations STEP 1 Press and hold until you hear a beep. Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each. When the desired station is reached, press ■ Scanning all radio stations within range STEP 1 Press . STEP 2 once again. All stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each. STEP 2 238 When the desired station is reached, press once again. 3-2. Using the audio system RDS (Radio Data System) (type A) This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which broadcast this information. ■ Receiving RDS broadcasts STEP 1 Press “” or “” on during FM reception. The type of program changes each time is pressed. 3 ● “ROCK” Interior features ● “EASYLIS” (Easy listening) ● “CLS/JAZZ” (Classical music and Jazz) ● “R & B” (Rhythm and Blues) ● “INFORM” (Information) ● “RELIGION” ● “MISC” (Miscellaneous) ● “ALERT” (Emergency messages) If the system receives no RDS stations, “NO PTY” appears on the display. STEP 2 Press , or “” or “” on . The radio seeks or scans the stations by the relevant program type. 239 3-2. Using the audio system ■ Displaying radio station names Press . ■ Displaying radio text messages Press twice. If “MSG” shows in the display, a text message will be displayed. If the text continues past the end of the display, hold until you hear a beep. is displayed. Press and XM® Satellite Radio (type A) ■ Receiving XM® Satellite Radio STEP 1 STEP 2 Press . The display changes as follows each time “SAT1”  “SAT2”  “SAT3” Turn is pressed. to select the desired channel in all categories or press “” or “” on to select the desired channel in the current category. ■ Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets Select the desired channel. Press the button the channel is to be set to (from to ) until you hear a beep. ■ Changing the channel category Press “” or “” on 240 . 3-2. Using the audio system ■ Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels ● Scanning channels in the current category Press . STEP 2 When the desired channel is reached, press ● Scanning preset channels STEP 1 Press and hold until you hear a beep. STEP 2 When the desired channel is reached, press ■ Displaying text information Press . again. STEP 1 again. The display will show up to 10 characters. The display changes as follows each time 3 is pressed. Interior features ● CH NAME ● TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM TITLE) ● NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEATURE) ● CH NUMBER 241 3-2. Using the audio system ■ When the battery is disconnected Station presets are erased. ■ Reception sensitivity ● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc. ● The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window. ■ XM® Satellite Radio An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous states and 10 Canadian provinces. ● XM® subscriptions For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe: U.S.A.  Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-877-515-3987. Canada  Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-515-3987. ● Radio ID You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a problem. Select “CH000” using , and the receiver's 8-character ID number will appear. ● Satellite tuner The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio. 242 3-2. Using the audio system ■ If the satellite radio does not operate normally If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action. “ANTENNA” The XM® antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM® antenna cable is attached securely. There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer. You have not subscribed to the XM® Satellite Radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code. Contact the XM® Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose the “CH000” and all free-to-air channels. “NO SIGNAL” “LOADING” The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact XM® Satellite Radio. The XM® signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal. The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit has received the information. “OFF AIR” The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel. “-----” There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No action needed. 243 Interior features “UNAUTH” 3 3-2. Using the audio system “CH UNAVL” The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987. ■ Certifications for the radio tuner This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of the following: ● Reorienting or relocate the receiving antenna. ● Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver. ● Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ● Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 244 3-2. Using the audio system Using the CD player Type A Repeat play Playback/Pause Random playback Displays text message Silencing a sound 3 Power Volume Track selection Search playback Interior features CD eject Playback CD selection CD load Type B Repeat play Random playback Playback/Pause Displays text message Silencing a sound Power Volume CD eject Playback Track selection CD selection CD load 245 3-2. Using the audio system Loading CDs ■ Loading a CD STEP 1 Push . “WAIT” is shown on the display. STEP 2 Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green. The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”. ■ Loading multiple CDs STEP 1 Press and hold until you hear a beep. “WAIT” is shown on the display. STEP 2 Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green. The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”. The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is inserted. STEP 3 Insert the next CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green again. Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs. To stop the operation, press 246 or . 3-2. Using the audio system Ejecting CDs ■ Ejecting a CD To select the CD to be ejected, STEP 1 press “” or “” on or . The number of the CD selected is shown on the display. Press and remove the CD. ■ Ejecting all the CDs Press and hold until you hear a beep, and then remove the CDs. 3 STEP 2 ■ Selecting a track Press “” to move up and “” to move down using until the desired track number is displayed. To fast forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on a beep. until you hear ■ Scanning a CD (type A) STEP 1 Press . The first ten seconds of each track will be played. STEP 2 Press again when the desired track is reached. 247 Interior features Selecting, fast-forwarding, reversing and scanning tracks 3-2. Using the audio system Selecting a CD ■ To select a CD to play To select the desired CD, press “” or “” on or . ■ To scan loaded CDs (type A) STEP 1 Press and hold until you hear a beep. The first ten seconds of the first track on each CD will be played. STEP 2 Press again when the desired CD is reached. Random playback ■ Current CD Press (RAND). ■ All CDs Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep. Repeat play ■ To repeat a track Press (RPT). ■ To repeat all of the tracks on a CD Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep. Playing and pausing tracks To play or pause a track, press ( ). Switching the display Press . Each time is pressed, the display changes in the order of Track no./ Elapsed time  CD title  Track title. 248 3-2. Using the audio system ■ Display Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time. If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding until you hear a beep will display the remaining characters. A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed. If is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been pressed for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters. Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all. ■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback Press (RAND), (RPT), (type A) again. 3 ■ When “LOAD”, “ERROR” or “WAIT” is shown on the display “ERROR”: This indicates a trouble either in the CD or inside the player. The CD may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down. “WAIT”: Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a while and then press or . Contact your Lexus dealer if the CD still cannot be played back. ■ Discs that can be used Discs with the marks shown below can be used. Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration. CDs with copy-protection features may not play correctly. 249 Interior features “LOAD”: This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the CD. 3-2. Using the audio system ■ CD player protection feature To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected. ■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods CDs may be damaged and may not play properly. ■ Lens cleaners Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player. NOTICE ■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Disc. Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function. ● CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in. (12 cm). ● Low-quality and deformed CDs. 250 3-2. Using the audio system NOTICE ● CDs with a transparent or translucent recording area. ● CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off. 3 Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the CDs or the player itself. ● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot. ● Do not apply oil to the CD player. ● Store CDs away from direct sunlight. ● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player. ● Do not insert more than one CD at a time. 251 Interior features ■ CD player precautions 3-2. Using the audio system Playing back MP3 and WMA discs Type A Playback/Pause Repeat play Random playback Folder selection Displays text message Silencing a sound File selection Power Volume File Playback selection Search playback CD eject CD selection CD load Type B Playback/Pause Repeat play Random playback Folder selection Displays text message Silencing a sound File selection Power Volume File selection CD eject 252 Playback CD selection CD load 3-2. Using the audio system Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs P. 246, 247 Selecting MP3 and WMA discs P. 248 Selecting a folder ■ Selecting folders one at a time Press () or () to select the desired folder. ■ Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder (type A) until you hear a beep. When the desired folder is once again. ■ Returning to the first folder Press and hold () until you hear a beep. Fast-forwarding and reversing files To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep. 253 Interior features Press and hold reached, press 3 3-2. Using the audio system Selecting and scanning files ■ Selecting one file at a time Turn or press “” or “” on to select the desired file. ■ Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder (type A) Press . When the desired file is reached, press once again. Repeat play ■ Repeating a file Press (RPT). ■ Repeating all of the files in a folder Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep. Random playback ■ To play files from a particular folder in random order Press (RAND). ■ To play all of the files on a disc in random order Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep. Playing and pausing files To play or pause a file, press 254 ( ). 3-2. Using the audio system Switching the display Press . Each time is pressed, the display changes in the order of Folder no./ File no./Elapsed time  Folder name  File name  Album title (MP3 only)  Track title  Artist name. ■ Display Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time. If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding until you hear a beep will display the remaining characters. A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed. If is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been pressed for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters. ■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback Press (RAND), (RPT), (type A) again. ■ When “LOAD”, “ERROR”, “WAIT” or “NO MUSIC” is shown on the display “LOAD”: This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the CD. “ERROR”: This indicates a trouble either in the CD or inside the player. The CD may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down. “WAIT”: Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a while and then press or . Contact your Lexus dealer if the CD still cannot be played back. “NO MUSIC”: This indicates that the MP3/WMA file is not included in the CD. 255 Interior features Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all. 3 3-2. Using the audio system ■ Discs that can be used Discs with the marks shown below can be used. Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration. ■ CD player protection feature To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected while the CD player is being used. ■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods CDs may be damaged and may not play properly. ■ Lens cleaners Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player. ■ MP3 and WMA files MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format. Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3 compression. WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format. This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format. There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats recorded by them that can be used. ● MP3 file compatibility • Compatible standards MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3) • Compatible sampling frequencies MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz) • Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR) MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps) • Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural 256 3-2. Using the audio system ● WMA file compatibility • Compatible standards WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9 • Compatible sampling frequencies 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) • Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback) Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps) Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps) ● Compatible media Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs. Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints. ● Compatible disc formats • Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2 CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2 • File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet) MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly. Items related to standards and limitations are as follows. • Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels • Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters • Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root) • Maximum number of files per disc: 255 ● File names The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma. ● Multi-sessions As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played. 257 Interior features The following disc formats can be used. 3 3-2. Using the audio system ● ID3 and WMA tags ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc. The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.) WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags. ● MP3 and WMA playback When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders. Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot be played. ● Extensions If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers. ● Playback • To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz. • CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc. • There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all. • When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all. • Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. 258 3-2. Using the audio system NOTICE ■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used P. 250 ■ CD player precautions P. 251 3 Interior features 259 3-2. Using the audio system Operating an iPod Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers. ■ Connecting an iPod STEP 1 Open the cover and connect the portable audio device. Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on. Type A STEP 2 Press . Press . Type B STEP 2 260 3-2. Using the audio system ■ Control panel Type A Repeat play Shuffle playback Playback/Pause Go back Displays text message Silencing a sound iPod menu/ Song selection 3 Song selection Song selection Interior features Power Volume Playback 261 3-2. Using the audio system Type B Repeat play Shuffle playback Playback/Pause Go back Displays text message Silencing a sound iPod menu/ Song selection Song selection Power Volume Song selection Playback Selecting a play mode STEP 1 Press STEP 2 Pressing or changes the play mode in the following order: “PLAYLISTS”“ARTISTS”“ALBUMS”“SONGS” “PODCASTS”“GENRES”“COMPOSERS” “AUDIOBOOKS” STEP 3 Press 262 to select iPod menu mode. to select the desired play mode. 3-2. Using the audio system ■ Play mode list Play mode First selection Second selection Third selection Fourth selection - - “PLAYLISTS” Playlists select Songs select “ARTISTS” Artists select “ALBUMS” Albums select Songs select - - “SONGS” Songs select - - - - Albums select Songs select - “PODCASTS” Albums select Songs select “GENRES” Genre select Artists select “COMPOSERS” Composers select Albums select Songs select “AUDIOBOOKS” Songs select - - Albums select Songs select - - 3 Interior features ■ Selecting a list STEP 1 Press STEP 2 Press to select the desired item. Pressing changes to the second selection list. Repeat the same procedure to select the desired item. STEP 3 or to display the first selection list. To return to the previous selection list, select “GO BACK” or press ( ). 263 3-2. Using the audio system Selecting songs Turn or press “” or “” on to select the desired song. Playing and pausing songs To play or pause a song, press ( ). Fast-forwarding and rewinding songs To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep. Shuffle playback ■ Playing songs from one playlist or album in random order Press (RAND). ■ Playing songs from all the playlists or albums in random order Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep. Repeat play Press (RPT). Switching the display Press . Each time is pressed, the display changes in the order of Elapsed time  Album title  Track title  Artist name. 264 3-2. Using the audio system Adjusting sound quality and volume balance STEP 1 Press STEP 2 Pressing to enter iPod menu mode. changes sound modes. (P. 278) ■ About iPod ● Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. ● iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. ■ iPod functions ● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used. 3 ● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may ● While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle's audio system instead. ■ iPod problems To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it. For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner's Manual. ■ Display Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time. If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding until you hear a beep will display the remaining characters. A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed. If is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been pressed for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters. Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all. 265 Interior features not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem. 3-2. Using the audio system ■ Canceling shuffle and repeat playback Press (RAND) or (RPT) again. ■ Error messages “ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection. “NO MUSIC”: This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod. “EMPTY”: This indicates that some available songs are not found in a selected playlist. “UPDATE”: This indicates that the version of the iPod is not compatible. Upgrade your iPod software to the latest version. ■ Compatible models Model Generation Software version iPod 5th generation Ver. 1.2.0 or higher iPod nano 1st generation Ver. 1.3.0 or higher 2nd generation Ver. 1.1.2 or higher 3rd generation Ver. 1.0.0 or higher iPod touch 1st generation Ver. 1.1.0 or higher iPod classic 1st generation Ver. 1.0.0 or higher Depending on differences between models or software version etc., some models listed above might be incompatible with this system. iPod 4th generation and earlier models are not compatible with this system. iPhone, iPod mini, iPod shuffle and iPod photo are not compatible with this system. Items related to standards and limitations are as follows: ● Maximum number of lists in device: 9999 ● Maximum number of songs in device: 65535 ● Maximum number of songs per list: 65535 266 3-2. Using the audio system CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Do not connect iPod or operate the controls. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to iPod ● Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player. ● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is connected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal. ● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or its ter- 3 minal. Interior features 267 3-2. Using the audio system Operating a USB memory Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers. ■ Connecting a USB memory STEP 1 Open the cover and connect the portable audio device. Turn on the power of the USB memory if it is not turned on. Type A STEP 2 Press . Press . Type B STEP 2 268 3-2. Using the audio system ■ Control panel Type A Playback/Pause Repeat play Random playback Folder selection Displays text message Silencing a sound 3 File selection File selection Interior features Power Volume Search playback Playback 269 3-2. Using the audio system Type B Playback/Pause Repeat play Random playback Folder selection Displays text message Silencing a sound File selection Power Volume File selection Playback Selecting a folder ■ Selecting folders one at a time Press () or () to select the desired folder. ■ Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder (type A) Press and hold reached, press until you hear a beep. When the desired folder is once again. ■ Returning to the first folder Press and hold () until you hear a beep. 270 3-2. Using the audio system Selecting files ■ Selecting one file at a time Turn or press “” or “” on to select the desired file. ■ Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder (type A) Press . When the desired file is reached, press once again. Playing and pausing files To play or pause a file, press ( 3 ). To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep. Random playback ■ Playing files from a folder in random order Press (RAND). ■ Playing all the files from a USB memory in random order Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep. 271 Interior features Fast-forwarding and rewinding files 3-2. Using the audio system Repeat play ■ Repeating a file Press (RPT). ■ Repeating all the files in a folder Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep. Switching the display Press . Each time is pressed, the display changes in the order of Elapsed time  Folder name  File name  Album title (MP3 only) Track title  Artist name. ■ USB memory functions ● Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, the device itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem. ● If the USB memory still does not begin operation after being disconnected and reconnected, format the memory. ■ Display Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time. If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding until you hear a beep will display the remaining characters. A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed. If is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been pressed for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters. Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all. ■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback Press 272 (RAND), (RPT), (type A) again. 3-2. Using the audio system ■ Error messages “ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection. “NO MUSIC”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB memory. ■ USB memory ● Compatible devices USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback ● Compatible device formats The following device formats can be used: 273 3 Interior features • USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 mbps) • File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows) • Correspondence class: Mass storage class MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly. Items related to standards and limitations are as follows: • Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels • Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root) • Maximum number of files in a device: 65025 • Maximum number of files per folder: 255 ● MP3 and WMA files MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format. Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3 compression. WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format. This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format. There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the media/formats on which the files are recorded. 3-2. Using the audio system ● MP3 file compatibility • Compatible standards MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2.5) • Compatible sampling frequencies MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz) MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz) • Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR) MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps) MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps) MPEG2.5: 32-160 (kbps) • Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural ● WMA file compatibility • Compatible standards WMA Ver. 9 • Compatible sampling frequencies HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) • Compatible bit rates HIGH PROFILE 32-320 (kbps, VBR) ● File names The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma. ● ID3 and WMA tags ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc. The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.) WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags. 274 3-2. Using the audio system ● MP3 and WMA playback • When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in the USB memory are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders. • When the USB memory is connected and the audio source is changed to USB memory mode, the USB memory will start playing the first file in the first folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the contents have not been changed), the USB memory will resume play from the same point in which it was last used. ● Extensions If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they will be skipped (not played). 3 ● Playback CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Do not connect USB memory or operate the controls. 275 Interior features • To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz. • There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all. • Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. 3-2. Using the audio system NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to USB memory ● Do not leave USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player. ● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal. ● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal. 276 3-2. Using the audio system Optimal use of the audio system Adjusting the sound quality Adjusting the ASL Changing the sound quality modes 3 Interior features 277 3-2. Using the audio system Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) Press . The ASL switches between on and off modes each time pressed. is ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the noise level as you drive your vehicle. Adjusting sound quality and volume balance ■ Changing sound quality modes Press Pressing . changes the sound mode in the following order: “BAS”“MID”“TRE”“FAD”“BAL” ■ Adjusting sound quality Press or to adjust the level. Mode displayed Sound quality mode Level “BAS”* Bass -5 to 5 “MID”* Mid-range -5 to 5 “TRE”* Treble -5 to 5 “FAD” Front/rear volume balance “BAL” Left/right volume balance Press  Press  Low High F7 to R7 Shifts to rear Shifts to front L7 to R7 Shifts to left Shifts to right *: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode. 278 3-2. Using the audio system Using the AUX port This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it through the vehicle’s speakers. STEP 1 Open the cover and connect the portable audio device. Type A STEP 2 3 . Press . Interior features Press Type B STEP 2 279 3-2. Using the audio system ■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself. ■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio device. 280 3-2. Using the audio system Using the steering wheel audio switches Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel. Operation may differ depending on the type of audio system or navigation system. For details, refer to the manual provided with the audio system or navigation system. Turns the power on, selects an audio source Increases/decreases volume Radio mode: Selects a radio station CD mode: Selects a track, file (MP3 and WMA) and disc 3 Interior features Bluetooth® audio mode: Selects a track and album iPod mode: Selects a song USB memory mode: Selects a file and folder Turning on the power Press when the audio system is turned off. The audio system can be turned off by holding beep. down until you hear a 281 3-2. Using the audio system Changing the audio source Press when the audio system is turned on. The audio source changes as follows each time is pressed. If no discs are inserted in the player, or if the external device is not connected, that mode will be skipped. Type A: FM1FM2SAT1SAT2SAT3CD player Bluetooth® audioAUXiPod or USB memoryAM Type B: FM1FM2CD playerBluetooth® audioAUX iPod or USB memoryAM Adjusting the volume Press “+” on ume. Hold down to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the volto continue increasing or decreasing the volume. Selecting a radio station STEP 1 Press to select radio mode. STEP 2 Press “”or “” on to select a radio station. To scan for receivable stations, press and hold beep. until you hear a Selecting a track/file or song to select CD, Bluetooth® audio, iPod or USB mem- STEP 1 Press ory mode. STEP 2 Press “” or “” on 282 to select the desired track/file or song. 3-2. Using the audio system Selecting an album STEP 1 STEP 2 Press to select Bluetooth® audio mode. Press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep. Selecting a folder STEP 1 STEP 2 Press to select USB memory mode. Press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep. Selecting a disc in the CD player STEP 1 Press to select CD mode. STEP 2 Press and hold “” or “” on 3 until you hear a beep. Interior features CAUTION ■ To reduce the risk of an accident Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel. 283 3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system Bluetooth® audio system The Bluetooth® audio system enables you to enjoy music played on a portable digital audio player (portable player) from the vehicle speakers via wireless communication. This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player does not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not function. Vehicles with a navigation system Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”. Vehicles without a navigation system Title Using the Bluetooth® audio system Page P. 287 ® Operating a Bluetooth enabled portable player P. 292 Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player P. 296 Bluetooth® audio system setup P. 302 ■ Conditions under which the system will not operate ● If using a portable player that does not support Bluetooth® ● If the portable player is switched off ● If the portable player is not connected ● If the portable player’s battery is low ● If the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box ● If metal is covering or touching the portable player 284 3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system ■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly accessed. (P. 326) ■ About Bluetooth® Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc. ■ Compatible models 3 ● Bluetooth® specifications: Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher) • A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher (Conformed: Ver. 1.2) • AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Conformed: Ver. 1.3) Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be connected to the Bluetooth® audio system. However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of portable player. ■ Certification for the Bluetooth® audio system FCC ID: AJDK018 IC ID: 775E-K018 MADE IN JAPAN This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen and RSS-210 of IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 285 Interior features ● Following profiles: 3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system CAUTION ■ FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) and more between the radiator and person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. ■ Caution while driving Do not connect portable players or operate the controls. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to portable players Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player. 286 3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system Using the Bluetooth® audio system ■ Audio unit Display A message, name, number, etc. is displayed. Lower-case characters and special characters cannot be displayed. If “BT” is not displayed, the Bluetooth® audio system cannot be used. 287 3 Interior features Displays information that is too long to be displayed at one time on the display (press and hold) Selects items such as menu and number : Selects an item : Inputs the selected item Bluetooth® connection condition 3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system Operating the system using voice commands By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice commands enable the operation of the Bluetooth® audio system without the need to check the display or operate , and . ■ Operation procedure when using voice commands Press the talk switch and follow voice guidance instructions. ■ Auxiliary commands when using voice commands The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the system using a voice command: “Cancel”: Exits the Bluetooth® audio system “Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction “Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure “Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered for the selected function 288 3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system Using the Bluetooth® audio system for the first time Before using the Bluetooth® audio system, it is necessary to register a Bluetooth® enabled portable player in the system. Follow the procedure below to register (pair) a portable player: STEP 1 Press and select “BT•A MENU” using , and . Press the talk switch or select “BT•A Setup” using , and . The introductory guidance and portable player name registration instructions are heard. STEP 2 STEP 3 a. Select “Record Name” using , and , and say the name to be registered. b. Press the talk switch and say the name to be registered. A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard. Select “Confirm” using a voice command or , and . A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction for inputting the passkey into the portable player is heard. STEP 5 STEP 6 Input the passkey into the portable player. Refer to the manual that comes with the portable player for the operation of the portable player. 289 Interior features STEP 4 Select “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)” using a voice command or , and . Register a portable player name by either of the following methods: 3 3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system Guidance for registration completion is heard. If the portable player has a Bluetooth® phone, the phone can be registered at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to register a Bluetooth® phone is heard. STEP 7 Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or and . (Bluetooth® phone P. 305) , Menu list of the Bluetooth® audio system First menu Second menu “BT•A Setup” “Setup” “System Setup” 290 Third menu Operation detail “Pair Audio” Registering a portable player “Connect” Selecting a portable player to be used “Change Name” Changing the registered name of a portable player “List Audios” Listing the registered portable players “Set Passkey” Changing the passkey “Delete Audio” Deleting a registered portable player “Guidance Vol” Setting voice guidance volume “Device Name” Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name “Initialize” Initializing the system 3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system ■ When using a voice command For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine. Say the command correctly and clearly. ■ Situations in which the system may not recognize your voice ● When driving on rough roads ● When driving at high speeds ● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone ● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise ■ Operations that cannot be performed while driving ● Operating the system with , and 3 ● Registering a portable player to the system Interior features ■ Changing the passkey P. 300 291 3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player Type A Playback/Pause Repeat play Random playback Album selection Displays text message BT•A menu Power Volume Track selection 292 Search playback Playback 3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system Type B Playback/Pause Repeat play Random playback Album selection Displays text message BT•A menu 3 Power Volume Interior features Playback Track selection Selecting an album To select the desired album, press () or (). Selecting tracks Press “” or “” on to select the desired track. Playing and pausing tracks To play or pause a track, press ( ). 293 3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system Fast-forwarding and rewinding tracks To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep. Random playback Press (RAND). Repeat play Press (RPT). Scanning tracks (type A) Press . Switching the display Press . Each time is pressed, the display changes in the order of Elapsed time  Album title  Track title  Artist name. Using the steering wheel audio switches P. 281 294 3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system ■ Bluetooth® audio system functions Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. ■ Display Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time. If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding until you hear a beep will display the remaining characters. A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed. If is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been pressed for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters. Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all. 3 ■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback (RAND), (RPT), or Interior features Press (type A) again. ■ Error messages “Memory Error”: This indicates a problem in the system. 295 3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player Registering a portable player in the Bluetooth® audio system allows the system to function. The following functions can be used for registered portable players: ■ Functions and operation procedures Pattern A To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a voice command or , and : ● Registering a portable player 1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”  3. “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)” ● Selecting a portable player to be used 1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”  3. “Connect Audio Player (Connect)” ● Changing the registered name of a portable player 1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”  3. “Change Name” ● Listing the registered portable players 1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”  3. “List Audio Players (List Audios)” ● Changing the passkey 1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”  3. “Set Passkey” ● Deleting a registered portable player 1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)”  3. “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)” 296 3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system Pattern B STEP 1 Press to select “BT•A MENU”. Press the talk switch or select “BT•A Setup” using , and . STEP 3 Select one of the following functions using a voice command or , and . ● Registering a portable player “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)” STEP 2 ● Selecting a portable player to be used “Connect Audio Player (Connect)” 3 Interior features ● Changing the registered name of a portable player “Change Name” ● Listing the registered portable players “List Audio Players (List Audios)” ● Changing the passkey “Set Passkey” ● Deleting a registered portable player “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)” Registering a portable player Select “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)” using a voice command or , and , and perform the procedure for registering a portable player. (P. 289) 297 3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system Selecting a portable player to be used Select “Connect Audio Player (Connect)” using a voice command or , and . Pattern A STEP 2 Select the portable player to be used by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or , and : a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable player. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the talk switch. Pattern B STEP 2 Select the portable player to be used using , and . Pattern A STEP 3 Press the talk switch and say “From Car” or “From Audio player”, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or , and . Pattern B STEP 1 STEP 3 Select “From Car” or “From Audio”, using . , and If “From Car” is selected, the portable player will be automatically connected whenever the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in either ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. 298 3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system Changing the registered name of a portable player Select “Change Name” using a voice command or , and . Pattern A STEP 2 Select the name of the portable player to be changed by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or , and : a. Press the talk switch and say the name of desired portable player. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the talk switch. Pattern B STEP 2 Select the desired portable player name to be changed using , and . STEP 1 Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using and , and say the new name. STEP 4 Select “Confirm” using a voice command or . , , and 299 Interior features STEP 3 3 3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system Listing the registered portable players Select “List Audio Players (List Audios)” using a voice command or , and . The list of registered portable players will be read aloud. When listing is complete, the system returns to “BT•A Setup”. Pressing the talk switch while the name of a portable player is being read aloud selects the portable player, and the following functions will become available: ● Selecting a portable player: “Connect Audio Player (Connect)” ● Changing a registered name: “Change Name” ● Deleting a portable player: “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)” Changing the passkey Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or , and . Pattern A STEP 2 Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or , and . Pattern B STEP 1 STEP 2 Select a 4 to 8-digit number using , and . The number should be input 1 digit at a time. STEP 3 When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been input, press again. If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing essary. 300 is not nec- 3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system Deleting a registered portable player Select “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)” using a voice command or , and . Pattern A STEP 2 Select the portable player to be deleted by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or , and : a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable player. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the talk switch. Pattern B STEP 1 STEP 3 Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or and . (Bluetooth® phone P. 305) , ■ The number of portable players that can be registered Up to 2 portable players can be registered in the system. 301 Interior features Select the desired portable player to be deleted using , and . If the portable player to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth® phone, the registration of the mobile phone can be deleted at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to delete a mobile phone is heard. STEP 2 3 3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system Bluetooth® audio system setup ■ System setup items and operation procedures Pattern A To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a voice command or , and : (P. 324) Pattern B STEP 1 Press to select “BT•A MENU”. STEP 2 Select “System Setup” using , Select one of the following items using : ● Setting voice guidance volume “Guidance Vol” (P. 326) STEP 3 and . , ● Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name “Device Name” (P. 326) ● Initializing the system “Initialize” (P. 326) 302 and 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Hands-free system for mobile phones The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your mobile phone without touching it. This system supports Bluetooth® mobile phones. Bluetooth® is a wireless data system that allows the mobile phone to wirelessly connect to the hands-free system and make/receive calls. Vehicles with a navigation system Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”. Vehicles without a navigation system Title Page P. 307 Making a phone call P. 315 Setting a mobile phone P. 319 Security and system setup P. 324 Using the phone book P. 328 Interior features Using the hands-free system 3 303 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) ■ Conditions under which the system will not operate ● If using a mobile phone that does not support Bluetooth® ● If the mobile phone is switched off ● If you are outside service range ● If the mobile phone is not connected ● If the mobile phone's battery is low ● If the mobile phone is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box ● If metal is covering or touching the phone ■ When using the hands-free system ● The audio system and voice guidance are muted when making a call. ● If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear. ● If the incoming call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard. ● Try to face toward the microphone as much as possible when speaking. ● In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party: • When driving on unpaved roads • When driving at high speeds • When a window is open • When the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone • When the air conditioning is set to high ■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly accessed. (P. 326) ■ About Bluetooth® Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc. 304 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) ■ Compatible models Compatible with HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Conformed: Ver. 1.5) and OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1. If your mobile phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth® phone. If your mobile phone supports OPP alone, you cannot use the Bluetooth® phone. ■ Certification for the hands-free system FCC ID: AJDK018 IC ID: 775E-K018 MADE IN JAPAN This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen and RSS-210 of IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ■ FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) and more between the radiator and person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. ■ Caution while driving Do not use a mobile phone or connect the Bluetooth® phone. 305 Interior features CAUTION 3 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to mobile phones Do not leave mobile phones in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the phone. 306 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Using the hands-free system (for mobile phones) ■ Audio unit Display A message, name, phone number, etc. is displayed. Lower-case characters and special characters cannot be displayed. If “BT” is not displayed, the hands-free phone system cannot be used. Reception level 307 3 Interior features Displays information that is too long to be displayed at one time on the display (press and hold) Selects speed dials Selects items such as menu and number : Selects an item : Inputs the selected item Bluetooth® connection condition 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) ■ Steering wheel switches Volume During an incoming call: Adjusts the ring tone volume During an ongoing call: Adjusts the receiver volume The voice guidance volume cannot be adjusted using this button. Off-hook switch Turns the hands-free system on/starts a call On-hook switch Turns the hands-free system off/ends a call/refuses a call Talk switch Turns the voice command system on (press)/turns the voice command system off (press and hold) ■ Microphone 308 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Operating the system using voice commands By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice commands enable the operation of the hands-free phone system without the need to check the display or operate , and . ■ Operation procedure when using voice commands Press the talk switch and follow the voice guidance instructions. ■ Auxiliary commands when using voice commands The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the system using a voice command: 309 3 Interior features “Cancel”: Exits the hands-free phone system “Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction “Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure “Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered for the selected function 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Using the hands-free phone system for the first time Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register a mobile phone in the system. The system will enter phone registration mode automatically when starting the system with no mobile phone registered. Follow the procedure below to register (pair) a mobile phone: Press the off-hook switch or the talk switch. The introductory guidance and phone name registration instructions are heard. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or , . Register a phone name by either of the following methods: and a. Select “Record Name” using , and , and say the name to be registered. b. Press the talk switch and say the name to be registered. A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard. Select “Confirm” using a voice command or , and . A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction for inputting the passkey into the mobile phone is heard. STEP 4 STEP 5 Input the passkey into the mobile phone. Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for the operation of the phone. Guidance for registration completion is heard. If the mobile phone has a Bluetooth® audio player, the audio player can be registered at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to register a Bluetooth® audio player is heard. STEP 6 310 Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or and . (Bluetooth® audio player P. 285) , 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Menu list of the hands-free phone system ■ Normal operation Second menu Third menu Operation detail “Callback” - - Dialing a number stored in the incoming call history memory “Redial” - - Dialing a number stored in the outgoing call history memory “Add Entry” - Adding a new phone number “Change Name” - Changing the registered name in the phone book “Delete Entry” - Deleting the registered data “Phonebook” “Del Spd Dial” - Deleting speed dials “List Names” - Listing the registered data “Speed Dial” - Setting speed dials 3 Interior features First menu 311 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) First menu Second menu “Security” “Setup” “Phone Setup” “System Setup” 312 Third menu Operation detail “Set PIN” Setting a PIN code “Phbk Lock” Locking the phone book “Phbk Unlock” Unlocking the phone book “Pair Phone” Registering the mobile phone to be used “Connect” Selecting a mobile phone to be used “Change Name” Changing the registered name of a mobile phone “List Phones” Listing the registered mobile phones “Set Passkey” Changing the passkey “Delete Phone” Deleting a registered mobile phone “Guidance Vol” Setting voice guidance volume “Device Name” Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name “Initialize” Initializing the system 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) ■ Short cut key operation First menu Second menu Operation detail “Dial XXX (name)” - Dialing a name registered in the phone book “Phone book add Entry” - Adding a new phone number “Phone book Change name” - Changing a registered name in the phone book “Phone book Delete Entry” - Deleting the registered data “Phone book List names” - Listing the registered data “Phone book Set Speed Dial” - Setting speed dials “Phone book Delete Speed Dial” - Deleting speed dials “Dial XXX (number)” - Dialing by inputting a number “Phonebook Unlock” Unlocking the phone book “Phonebook Lock” Locking the phone book Interior features “Phonebook” 3 313 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) ■ Automatic volume adjustment When vehicle speed reaches 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less. ■ When using a voice command For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine, # (pound),  (star), and + (plus). Say the command correctly and clearly. ■ Situations in which the system may not recognize your voice ● When driving on rough roads ● When driving at high speeds ● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone ● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise ■ Operations that cannot be performed while driving ● Operating the system with , ● Registering a mobile phone to the system ■ Changing the passkey P. 322 314 and 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Making a phone call ■ Making a phone call ● Dialing by inputting a number “Dial by number” ● Dialing by inputting a name “Dial by name” ● Speed dialing ● Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory “Redial” ● Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory “Call back” 3 Interior features ■ Receiving a phone call ● Answering a phone call ● Refusing a phone call ■ Transferring a phone call ■ Call waiting ■ Using the call history memory ● Dialing ● Storing data in the phone book ● Deleting 315 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Dialing by inputting a number STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 Press the talk switch and say “Dial by number”. Press the talk switch and say the phone number. Dial by one of the following methods: a. Press the off-hook switch. b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”. c. Select “Dial” using , and . Dialing by inputting a name STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 Press the talk switch and say “Dial by name”. Select a registered name to be input by either of the following methods: a. Press the talk switch and say a registered name. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. Press the talk switch when the desired name is read aloud. Dial by one of the following methods: a. Press the off-hook switch. b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”. c. Select “Dial” using , and . Speed dialing STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 316 Press the off-hook switch. Press the preset button in which the desired number is registered. Press the off-hook switch. 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) When receiving a phone call ■ Answering a phone call Press the off-hook switch. ■ Refusing a phone call Press the on-hook switch. Transferring a phone call A call can be transferred between the mobile phone and system while dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the following methods: a. Operate the mobile phone. b. Press the off-hook switch*1. c. Press the talk switch and say “Call Transfer”*2. *1: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call from the mobile phone to the system during a call. *2: While the vehicle is in motion, calls cannot be transferred from the system to the mobile phone. Call waiting When a call is interrupted by an incoming call from a third party, the following options will become available: ● Answer the incoming call: Press the off-hook switch. (Press the offhook switch again as necessary to switch back and forth between calls.) ● Refuse the incoming call: Press the on-hook switch. 317 Interior features Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for the operation of the phone. 3 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Using the call history memory Follow the procedure below to use a number stored in the call history memory: STEP 1 STEP 2 Press the talk switch and say “Redial” (when using a number stored in the outgoing call history memory) or “Call back” (when using a number stored in the incoming call history memory). Select the number by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired number is displayed. b. Select the desired number using , and . The following operations can be performed: Dialing: Press the off-hook switch or select “Dial” using a voice command or , and . STEP 3 Storing the number in the phone book: Select “Store” and then “Confirm” using a voice command or , and . Deleting: Select “Delete” and then “Confirm” using a voice command or , and . ■ Call waiting ● If your phone does not support HFP Ver. 1.5, this function cannot be used. ● Call waiting operation may differ depending on your mobile phone and service provider. ■ Call history Up to 5 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming call history memories. ■ When talking on the phone ● Do not talk at the same time as the other party. ● Keep the volume of the incoming voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will increase. 318 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Setting a mobile phone Registering a mobile phone in the hands-free phone system allows the system to function. The following functions can be used for registered mobile phones: ■ Functions and operation procedures To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a voice command or , and : ● Registering a mobile phone 1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Pair Phone” ● Selecting a mobile phone to be used 1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Connect Phone (Connect)” 3 Interior features ● Changing the registered name of a mobile phone 1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Change Name” ● Listing the registered mobile phones 1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “List Phones” ● Changing the passkey 1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Set Passkey” ● Deleting a registered mobile phone 1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Delete Phone” Registering a mobile phone Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or , and , and perform the procedure for registering a mobile phone. (P. 310) 319 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Selecting a mobile phone to be used Select “Connect Phone (Connect)” using a voice command or , and . Pattern A STEP 2 Select the mobile phone to be used by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or , and : a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired mobile phone. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Phones”. When the name of the desired mobile phone is read aloud, press the talk switch. Pattern B STEP 1 STEP 2 320 Select the mobile phone to be used using . , and 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Changing the registered name of a mobile phone Select “Change Name” using a voice command or , and . Pattern A STEP 2 Select the name of the mobile phone to be changed by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or , and : a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired mobile phone. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Phones”. When the name of the desired mobile phone is read aloud, press the talk switch. Pattern B STEP 2 Select the desired mobile phone name to be changed using , and . STEP 1 Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using and , and say the new name. STEP 4 Select “Confirm” using a voice command or . , , and 321 Interior features STEP 3 3 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Listing the registered mobile phones Select “List Phones” using a voice command or , and The list of registered mobile phones will be read aloud. When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone Setup”. . Pressing the talk switch while the name of a mobile phone is being read aloud selects the mobile phone, and the following functions will become available: ● Selecting a mobile phone: “Connect Phone (Connect)” ● Changing a registered name: “Change Name” ● Deleting a mobile phone: “Delete Phone” Changing the passkey Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or , and . Pattern A STEP 2 Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or , and . Pattern B STEP 1 STEP 2 Select a 4 to 8-digit number using , and . The number should be input 1 digit at a time. STEP 3 When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been input, press again. If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing essary. 322 is not nec- 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Deleting a registered mobile phone Select “Delete Phone” using a voice command or , and . Pattern A STEP 2 Select the mobile phone to be deleted by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or , and : a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired mobile phone. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Phones”. When the name of the desired mobile phone is read aloud, press the talk switch. Pattern B STEP 1 STEP 3 Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or and . (Bluetooth® audio player P. 285) , ■ The number of mobile phones that can be registered Up to 6 mobile phones can be registered in the system. 323 Interior features Select the desired mobile phone to be deleted using , and . If the mobile phone to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth® audio player, the registration of the audio player can be deleted at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to delete a Bluetooth® audio player is heard. STEP 2 3 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Security and system setup ■ Security setting items and operation procedures To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a voice command or , and : ● Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number) 1. “Setup”  2. “Security”  3. “Set PIN” ● Locking the phone book 1. “Setup”  2. “Security”  3. “Phonebook Lock (Phbk Lock)” ● Unlocking the phone book 1. “Setup”  2. “Security”  3. “Phonebook Unlock (Phbk Unlock)” ■ System setup items and operation procedures To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using , and : ● Setting voice guidance volume 1. “Setup”  2. “System Setup”  3. “Guidance Vol” ● Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name 1. “Setup”  2. “System Setup”  3. “Device Name” ● Initializing the system 1. “Setup”  2. “System Setup”  3. “Initialize” 324 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Setting or changing the PIN ■ Setting a PIN STEP 1 Select “Set PIN” using a voice command or . STEP 2 Enter a PIN using a voice command or When using , and , , and and . , input the code 1 digit at a time. ■ Changing the PIN Select “Set PIN” using a voice command or . STEP 2 Enter the registered PIN using a voice command or and . STEP 3 Enter a new PIN using a voice command or . When using , and , , and , and , input the code 1 digit at a time. Locking or unlocking the phone book STEP 1 STEP 2 Select “Phonebook Lock (Phbk Lock)” or “Phonebook Unlock (Phbk Unlock)” using a voice command or , and . Input the PIN by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or , and : a. Press the talk switch and say the registered PIN. b. Input a new PIN using , and . 325 3 Interior features STEP 1 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Setting voice guidance volume STEP 1 Select “Guidance Vol” using , and STEP 2 Change the voice guidance volume using . . , and Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name STEP 1 Select “Device Name” using STEP 2 Press and name. STEP 3 Select “Go Back” using “System Setup”. or , and . to display the Bluetooth® device address , and to return to Initializing the system STEP 1 Select “Initialize” and then “Confirm” using . STEP 2 Select “Confirm” again using 326 , and , and . 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) ■ Initialization ● The following data in the system can be initialized: ■ When the phone book is locked The following functions cannot be used: ● Dialing by inputting a name ● Speed dialing ● Dialing a number stored in the call history memory ● Using the phone book 327 3 Interior features • Phone book • Outgoing and incoming call history • Speed dials • Registered mobile phone data • Security code • Registered Bluetooth® enabled portable player data • Passkey for the mobile phones • Passkey for the Bluetooth® audio players • Guidance volume • Receiver volume • Ring tone volume ● Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored to its original state. 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Using the phone book To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a voice command or , and : ● Adding a new phone number 1. “Phonebook”  2. “Add Entry” ● Changing the registered name in the phone book 1. “Phonebook”  2. “Change Name” ● Listing the registered data 1. “Phonebook”  2. “List Names” ● Setting speed dials 1. “Phonebook”  2. “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” ● Deleting the registered data 1. “Phonebook”  2. “Delete Entry” ● Deleting speed dials 1. “Phonebook”  2. “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)” Adding a new phone number The following methods can be used to add a new phone number: ● Inputting a phone number using a voice command ● Transferring data from the mobile phone ● Inputting a phone number using , and ● Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming call history 328 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) ■ Adding procedure Select “Add Entry” using a voice command or , and . STEP 2 Use one of the following methods to input a telephone number: Inputting a telephone number using a voice command: STEP 1 Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for details on transferring data. STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Next” until the desired data is displayed, and select “Confirm” using a voice command. b. Select the desired data using . , and 329 3 Interior features STEP2-1 Select “By Voice” using a voice command or , and . STEP2-2 Press the talk switch, say the desired number, and select “Confirm” using a voice command. Transferring data from the mobile phone: STEP2-1 Select “By Phone” and then “Confirm” using a voice command or , and . STEP2-2 Transfer the data from the mobile phone. 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Inputting a phone number using , and STEP2-1 Select “Manual Input” using : , STEP2-2 Input a phone number using and press again. and , . and , Input the phone number 1 digit at a time. Selecting a phone number from the outgoing or incoming call history: STEP 3 STEP2-1 Select “Call History” using a voice command or , and . STEP2-2 Select “Outgoing” or “Incoming” using a voice command or , and . STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired data is displayed, and select “Confirm” using a voice command. b. Select the desired data using , and . Select the name to be registered by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or , and : a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name. b. Select “Record Name” using the desired name. STEP 4 , Select “Confirm” using a voice command or . and , and say , and In STEP 4 , selecting “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” instead of “Confirm” registers the newly added phone number as a speed dial. 330 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Changing the registered name in the phone book Select “Change Name” using a voice command or , and . Pattern A STEP 2 Select the name to be changed by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or , and : a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. When the desired name is read aloud, press the talk switch. Pattern B STEP 1 Select the desired name to be changed using . , STEP 3 Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using and , and say the new name. STEP 4 Select “Confirm” using a voice command or . , and , and Listing the registered data Select “List Names” using a voice command or , and The list of the registered data will be read aloud. When listing is complete, the system returns to the “Phonebook”. . Pressing the talk switch while the desired data is being read aloud selects the data, and the following function will become available: ● Dialing: “Dial” ● Changing a registered name: “Change Name” ● Deleting an entry: “Delete Entry” ● Setting a speed dial: “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” 331 Interior features STEP 2 3 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Setting speed dials Select “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” using a voice command or , and . Pattern A STEP 2 Select the data to be registered as a speed dial by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or , and : a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. When the desired name is read aloud, press the talk switch. Pattern B STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 332 Select the desired data using , and . Select the desired preset button and register the data into speed dial by either of the following methods: a. Press the desired preset button and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or , and . b. Press and hold the desired preset button. 3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones) Deleting the registered data Select “Delete Entry” using a voice command or , and . Pattern A STEP 2 Select the data to be deleted by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or , and : a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired phone number. b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. When the name of the desired phone number is read aloud, press the talk switch. Pattern B STEP 1 Select the desired data to be deleted using . , and Deleting speed dials STEP 1 STEP 2 Select “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)” using a voice command or , and . Press the preset button to which the desired speed dial is registered and select “Confirm” using a voice command or , and . ■ Limitation of number of digits A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered. 333 Interior features STEP 2 3 3-5. Using the interior lights Interior lights list Your Lexus is equipped with the illuminated entry system to assist in entering the vehicle. Owing to the function of the system, the lights shown in the following illustration automatically turn on/off according to the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, whether the doors are opened/closed, and the “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode. Front personal lights (P. 336) Front interior lights (P. 336) Shift lever light (when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode) Rear personal lights (P. 336) Rear overhead courtesy light Rear interior light Front door courtesy lights 334 3-5. Using the interior lights Front footwell lights Outer foot lights Turning the instrument panel light control knob fully to the left disables the shift lever light and front footwell lights. ■ To prevent battery discharge If the overhead courtesy lights and interior lights remain on when the door is not fully closed and the interior light switch (door position on/off) is on, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes. ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer 3 Settings (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 544) Interior features 335 3-5. Using the interior lights Interior lights and personal lights Interior lights Models without a moon roof Door position on/off On/off Models with a moon roof Door position on/off On/off Personal lights Front (models without a moon roof) On/off 336 3-5. Using the interior lights Personal lights Front (models with a moon roof) On/off Rear On/off 3 Interior features 337 3-6. Using the storage features List of storage features Overhead console Glove box Bottle holders/door pockets Cup holders Console box/cup holder Auxiliary box (if equipped) CAUTION ■ Items that should not be left in the storage spaces Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high: ● Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored items. ● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard. 338 3-6. Using the storage features Glove box Glove box Open (push button) Lock with the mechanical key Unlock with the mechanical key ■ Glove box light 3 ■ Trunk opener main switch The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. ( P. 51) CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open glove box or the items stored inside. 339 Interior features The glove box light turns on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. 3-6. Using the storage features Console box Console box Pull up the knob to release the lock. Slide the armrest. Pull up the knob to release the lock. Lift the armrest to open. ■ Console box light The console box light turns on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ Using the console box to store CD cases Store a CD case with the hinged portion facing either the front or back of the console box. CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Keep the console box closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. 340 3-6. Using the storage features Overhead console Overhead console Press the overhead console. The overhead console is useful for temporarily storing sunglasses and similar small items. CAUTION 3 ■ Caution while driving 341 Interior features Do not leave the overhead console open while driving. Items may fall out and cause death or serious injury in case of an accident or sudden stop. 3-6. Using the storage features Cup holders Cup holders Front (press-in type) Press down and release the front of the cup holder lid. Front (slide type) Pull up the knob to release the lock. Slide the armrest. 342 3-6. Using the storage features Cup holders Rear Press in and release the cup holders on the rear center armrest. ■ Using the front cup holder (slide type) to store small items Remove the cup holder insert by holding the base part. 3 Interior features CAUTION ■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns. ■ When not in use Keep the cup holders closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. 343 3-6. Using the storage features Bottle holders/door pockets and auxiliary box Bottle holders/door pockets The door pockets can be opened and closed. When installing the bottle, close the cap of the bottle. CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Keep the door pockets closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. Auxiliary box (if equipped) Push the back part of the lid to open. Push the lid again to close. CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Do not leave the auxiliary box open while driving. Items stored in it may fall out and cause death or serious injury in case of an accident or sudden stop. 344 3-7. Other interior features Sun visors Forward position: Flip down. Side position: Flip down, unhook, and swing to the side. 3 Interior features 345 3-7. Other interior features Vanity mirrors Slide the cover. The light turns on when the cover is opened. 346 3-7. Other interior features Clock Adjusts the hour. Adjusts the minutes. Rounds to the nearest hour.* *: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29  1:00 1:30 to 1:59  2:00 ■ The clock is displayed when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. 3 Interior features 347 3-7. Other interior features Satellite switches The satellite switches can be used to change the settings of various features. Settings are shown on the multi-information display. ■ Operating the satellite switches STEP 1 Bring up satellite switch mode on the multi-information display. Press “”, “” or the “ON/OFF” button. STEP 2 Select the item whose setting is to be changed. Press “” or “” to display the item whose setting is to be changed. 348 3-7. Other interior features STEP 3 Change the settings. Press the “ON/OFF” button to change the settings (e.g. on/off). ■ Items that can be set using the satellite switches Intuitive parking assist (P. 195) on/off (if equipped) 3 ID code selection for the tire pressure warning system (P. 420) Pre-collision braking function (P. 207) on/off (if equipped) 349 Interior features Tire pressure warning system initialization (P. 418) 3-7. Other interior features ■ Changing the settings Each item is displayed and its setting can be changed only in the following conditions: ● Intuitive parking assist: When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNI- TION ON mode. ● Items other than the above: When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the vehicle is stopped. ■ Display The display will return to the original display if the satellite switches are not operated for an extended period. Even if the display is in satellite switch mode, it will switch in the event of a warning or when the dynamic radar cruise control is used. If this occurs, press any of the satellite switches or “DISP” switch on the steering wheel to return the display to satellite switch mode. 350 3-7. Other interior features Ashtrays Front Push the back part of the lid to open. Push the lid again to close. Push the lever to remove the ashtray. Rear Pull the ashtray lid to open. 3 Interior features Hold the plate down and pull the ashtray upwards to remove. CAUTION ■ When not in use Keep the ashtray closed. Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. ■ To prevent fire ● Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, then make sure the ashtray is fully closed. ● Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray. : If equipped 351 3-7. Other interior features Cigarette lighter Push the back part of the lid to open, and push the cigarette lighter down. The cigarette lighter will pop up when it is ready for use. ■ The cigarette lighter can be used when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. CAUTION ■ When not in use Keep the lid closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. ■ To avoid burns or fires ● Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter. ● Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire. ● Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet. : If equipped 352 3-7. Other interior features Power outlet The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less than 10 A. 3 ■ The power outlet can be used when NOTICE ■ To avoid damaging the power outlet Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit. ■ To prevent the fuse from being blown Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A. ■ To prevent battery discharge Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running. 353 Interior features The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. 3-7. Other interior features Seat heaters Driver’s seat Front passenger’s seat Heats the seats The indicator light comes on. The higher the number, the warmer the seats become. ■ The seat heaters can be used when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ When not in use Set the dial to “0”. The indicator light turns off. 354 3-7. Other interior features CAUTION ■ Burns ● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns: • • • • Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled Persons with sensitive skin Persons who are fatigued Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.) ● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater. Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating. ■ To prevent seat heater damage Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat. ■ To prevent battery discharge Turn the switches off when the engine is not running. 355 Interior features NOTICE 3 3-7. Other interior features Armrest Pull the armrest down for use. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the armrest Do not place too much strain on the armrest. 356 3-7. Other interior features Trunk storage extension Long objects can be loaded in the vehicle by utilizing the trunk space and rear seat area. STEP 1 Pull down the armrest. STEP 2 Lift up the trunk door cover. 3 Interior features STEP 3 Open the inside trunk door from the trunk and load baggage or other items. 357 3-7. Other interior features CAUTION ■ When not in use Ensure that the inside trunk door is closed. In the event of sudden braking, items stored in the trunk may be thrown forward into the cabin, resulting in injury. 358 3-7. Other interior features Coat hooks To use the coat hook, push it in. CAUTION 3 ■ Items that must not be hung on the hook 359 Interior features Do not hang a coat hanger or other hard or sharp object on the hook. If the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles that cause death or serious injury. 3-7. Other interior features Assist grips An assist grip installed on the ceiling can be used to support your body while sitting on the seat. CAUTION ■ Assist grip Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your seat. NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the assist grip Do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip. 360 3-7. Other interior features Floor mat Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet. Fix the floor mat in place using the retaining hooks (clips) provided. The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) and the fixing procedure of the floor mat for your vehicle may differ from those shown in the illustration. For details, refer to the floor mat retention clip installation instructions supplied with the clips. 3 Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident. ■ When installing the driver's floor mat ● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles, even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats. ● Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat. ● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided. ● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other. ● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down. ■ Before driving ● Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor. ● With the engine stopped and the shift lever in P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to make sure it does not interfere with the floor mat. 361 Interior features CAUTION 3-7. Other interior features Trunk features ■ Cargo hooks Cargo hooks are provided for securing loose items. ■ Shopping bag hooks ■ First-aid kit storage belt Loosen Tighten 362 3-7. Other interior features ■ Warning triangle storage belt Loosen Tighten ■ Luggage mat Pull the lever upwards when lifting the luggage mat up. 3 Interior features The lever can be hooked on the edge of the trunk. 363 3-7. Other interior features CAUTION ■ When the cargo hooks are not in use To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when they are not in use. NOTICE ■ When closing the trunk Do not leave the luggage mat lever hooked on the edge of the trunk. The luggage mat may get damaged. 364 3-7. Other interior features Garage door opener The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other devices. The garage door opener (HomeLink Universal Transceiver) is manufactured under license from HomeLink. Programming the HomeLink (for U.S.A. owners) The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming method below appropriate for the device. Interior features Indicator Buttons ■ Programming the HomeLink STEP 1 3 Point the remote control transmitter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink buttons. Keep the HomeLink indicator light in view while programming. 365 3-7. Other interior features STEP 2 Press and hold one of the HomeLink buttons and the transmitter button. When the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid flash, you can release both buttons. If the HomeLink indicator light comes on but does not flash, or flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and remains lit, the HomeLink button is already programmed. Use the other buttons or follow the “Reprogramming a HomeLink button” instructions. (P. 368) STEP 3 Test the HomeLink operation by pressing the newly programmed button. If a HomeLink button has been programmed for a garage door, check to see if the garage door opens and closes. If the garage door does not operate, see if your remote control transmitter is of the rolling code type. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button. The remote control transmitter is of the rolling code type if the HomeLink indicator light flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and then remains lit. If your transmitter is of the rolling code type, proceed to the heading “Programming a rolling code system”. STEP 4 366 Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink buttons. 3-7. Other interior features ■ Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S.A. owners) If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the heading “Programming the HomeLink” before proceeding with the steps listed below. STEP 1 Locate the learn button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener motor. Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener motor for the location of the learn button. STEP 2 Press the learn button. Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3 below.  STEP 3 Press and hold the vehicle's programmed HomeLink button for If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third press and release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door. The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink signal and operate the garage door. Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system for any of the remaining HomeLink buttons. ■ Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming all devices in the Canadian market STEP 1 Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the surface of the HomeLink. STEP 4 Keep the HomeLink indicator light in view while programming. STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Press and hold the selected HomeLink button. Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control button for two seconds each until step 4 is complete. When the indicator light on the HomeLink compatible transceiver starts to flash rapidly, release the buttons. 367 Interior features 2 seconds and release it. Repeat this step once again. The garage door may open. 3 3-7. Other interior features Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly. STEP 6 Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink buttons. ■ Programming other devices To program other devices such as home security systems, home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance. STEP 5 ■ Reprogramming a button The individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Reprogramming a HomeLink button” instructions. Operating the HomeLink Press the appropriate HomeLink button. The HomeLink indicator light should come on. The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle continues to send a signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed. Reprogramming a HomeLink button Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. After 20 seconds, the HomeLink indicator light will start flashing slowly. Next, while still pressing and holding the HomeLink button, press and hold the button on the transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid flash. 368 3-7. Other interior features Erasing the entire HomeLink memory (all three programs) Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the indicator light flashes. If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLink memory. ■ Before programming 3 ● Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter. the HomeLinkbutton. ■ Certification for the garage door opener For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: NZLWZLHL4 FCC ID: NZLOBIHL4 NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada NOTE: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 369 Interior features ● The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away from 3-7. Other interior features ■ When support is necessary Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515. CAUTION ■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device The garage door on other devices may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm. ■ Conforming to federal safety standards Do not use the HomeLink Compatible Transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury. 370 3-7. Other interior features Compass The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading. ■ Operation To turn the compass on or off, push the switch. 3 ■ Displays and directions Direction N North NE Northeast E East SE Southeast S South SW Southwest W West NW Northwest Interior features Display : If equipped 371 3-7. Other interior features Calibrating the compass The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle. If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will deviate. To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following. ■ Deviation calibration STEP 1 Stop the vehicle. STEP 2 STEP 3 Press the switch until a number (1 to 15) appears on the compass display. Press the switch, and referring to the map above, select the number of the zone where you are. If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is complete. 372 3-7. Other interior features ■ Circling calibration When “C” appears on the display, drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less in a circle until a direction is displayed. If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is displayed. ■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation 3 The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions: ● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning. ● The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.). ● The vehicle has become magnetized. (There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.) ● The battery has been disconnected. ● A door is open. 373 Interior features ● The vehicle is on an inclined surface. 3-7. Other interior features CAUTION ■ While driving the vehicle Do not adjust the display. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped. ■ When doing the circling calibration Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration. NOTICE ■ To avoid compass malfunctions Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror. Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor. ■ To ensure normal operation of the compass ● Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields. ● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration. 374 3-7. Other interior features Safety Connect Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is supported by Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week. Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped vehicles. By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available at Lexus.com. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such then-applicable Terms and Conditions. Interior features ■ System components 3 Microphone LED light indicators “SOS” button : If equipped 375 3-7. Other interior features ■ Services Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available: ● Automatic Collision Notification* Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service providers. (P. 378) *: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2 ● Stolen Vehicle Location Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (P. 379) ● Emergency Assistance Button (SOS) Connects drivers to response-center support. (P. 379) ● Enhanced Roadside Assistance Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (P. 379) ■ Subscription After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services. A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact your Lexus dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) or push the “SOS” button in your vehicle for further subscription details. 376 3-7. Other interior features ■ Safety Connect Services Information ● Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth® technology will not be possible during Safety Connect. ● Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Lexus models. Con- tact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available; charges vary by subscription term selected. ● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle ● Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunica- tions Act and the device is not TTY compatible. ■ Languages The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish. Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling. ■ When contacting the response center You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy. 377 3 Interior features Location will function in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in Canada, and Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United States (except Hawaii) and in Canada. No Safety Connect services will function outside of the United States in countries other than Canada. 3-7. Other interior features Safety Connect LED light Indicators When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the red indicator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the service is active. The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage conditions: ● Green indicator light on = Active service ● Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process ● Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction (contact your Lexus dealer) ● No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active Safety Connect services ■ Automatic Collision Notification In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to automatically call the response center. The responding agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services provider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent to the location. 378 3-7. Other interior features ■ Stolen Vehicle Location If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a police report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1-800-25LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service. In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle. Further information is available at Lexus.com. If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent that you are not experiencing an emergency. ■ Enhanced Roadside Assistance Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already included warranty-based Lexus roadside service. Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Enhanced Roadside Assistance services and their limitations, please see the Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are available at Lexus.com. 379 3 Interior features ■ Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”) In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch the necessary assistance required. 3-7. Other interior features Safety information for Safety Connect Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect. ■ Exposure to radio frequency signals The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals. In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies. ● ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992] ● NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement) Report 86 [1986] ● ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) [1996] Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and industries reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1). The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to those standards. 380 3-7. Other interior features ■ Certification for Lexus Enform with Safety Connect FCC ID: O9EGTM1 FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101 FCC ID: N7NGTM2 NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. 3 Interior features 381 3-7. Other interior features 382 Maintenance and care 4-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior............ 384 Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior............. 388 4 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Do-it-yourself service precautions........................... 397 Hood.......................................... 400 Positioning a floor jack .......... 401 4-2. Maintenance Engine compartment ........... 403 Maintenance requirements ......................... 391 Tires.............................................. 417 General maintenance .......... 393 Wheels...................................... 432 Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs............................... 396 Air conditioning filter ........... 434 Tire inflation pressure........... 428 Electronic key battery.......... 436 Checking and replacing fuses ........................................ 438 Headlight aim ......................... 452 Light bulbs................................ 454 383 4-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition. ● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust. ● Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois. ● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water. ● Wipe away any water. ● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates. If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool. ■ Automatic car washes ● Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle. ● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle’s paint. ● Turn the wipers off before washing the vehicle. ■ High pressure car washes ● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows. ● Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly. 384 4-1. Maintenance and care ■ Aluminum wheels ● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint. ● Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving for long distance in the hot weather. ● Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use. ■ Bumpers Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners. ■ Front side windows water-repellent coating ● The following precautions can extend the effectiveness of the water-repellent coating. 385 4 Maintenance and care • Remove any dirt, etc. from the front side windows regularly. • Do not allow dirt and dust to accumulate on the windows for a long period. Clean the windows with a soft, damp cloth as soon as possible. • Do not use wax or glass cleaners that contain abrasives when cleaning the windows. • Do not use any metallic objects to remove condensation build up. ● When the water-repellent performance has become insufficient, the coating can be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer. 4-1. Maintenance and care CAUTION ■ When cleaning the windshield Off Set the wiper switch to off. If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate unexpectedly in the following situations, and may result in hands being caught or other serious injuries and cause damage to the wiper blades. ● When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is touched by hand ● When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor ● If something bumps against the windshield ● If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the raindrop sensor ■ Exhaust pipes and rear bumper exhaust diffusers Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipes and rear bumper exhaust diffusers to become quite hot. Therefore, do not touch them while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off. When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the exhaust pipes and rear bumper exhaust diffusers until they have cooled sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes and diffusers can cause burns. 386 4-1. Maintenance and care NOTICE ■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum wheels etc.) ● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases: • • • • • After driving near the sea coast After driving on salted roads If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface If you see dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings on the paint After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances • If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud • If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface ● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately. ● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low humidity when storing the wheels. ■ Cleaning the exterior lights 4 ● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush. ● Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to the lenses. ■ To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side wiper arm upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning the wipers to their original position, do so from the passenger side first. ■ When using an automatic car wash Set the wiper switch to the off position. If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be damaged. 387 Maintenance and care This may damage the surfaces of the lights. 4-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep it in top condition: ■ Protecting the vehicle interior Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water. ■ Cleaning the leather areas ● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. ● Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent. Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent. ● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent. ● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area. ■ Synthetic leather areas ● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner. ● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge or soft cloth. ● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth. 388 4-1. Maintenance and care ■ Caring for leather areas Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior. ■ Shampooing the carpets There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible. ■ Seat belts Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts. CAUTION ■ Water in the vehicle ● Do not splash or spill liquid the vehicle. 4 Doing so may cause electrical components, etc. to malfunction or catch fire. (P. 96) Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or serious injury. ■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel) Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. 389 Maintenance and care ● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. 4-1. Maintenance and care NOTICE ■ Cleaning detergents ● Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or alkaline solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces. ● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other interior part’s painted surface may be damaged. ■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces. ● Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately. ● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer. ● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly. ■ Water on the floor Do not wash the vehicle floor with water. Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also cause the body to rust. ■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window ● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna. ● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna. 390 4-2. Maintenance Maintenance requirements To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks. Lexus recommends the following maintenance. ■ General maintenance General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer. ■ Scheduled maintenance Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule. For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s Manual Supplement/ Scheduled Maintenance”. ■ Do-it-yourself maintenance You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself. Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage. 4 Maintenance and care The use of Lexus Repair Manuals is recommended. For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s Guide”, “Warranty and Services Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”. ■ Repair and replacement It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage. 391 4-2. Maintenance ■ Reset the maintenance data (U.S.A. only) After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the maintenance data. To reset the data, follow the procedures described below: STEP 1 Switch the display to the odometer (P. 154) when the engine is running. STEP 2 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. STEP 3 While pressing the trip meter reset button, set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode (but do not start the engine because otherwise the reset mode will be cancelled). Continue to press and hold the button until the multi-information display . ■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer ● Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle. ● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it. CAUTION ■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained It could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible serious injury or death. ■ Warning in handling of battery ● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area. ● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately. ● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (P. 413) 392 4-2. Maintenance General maintenance Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Services Guide” or “Owners Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for advice. Engine compartment Items Check points Maintenance-free. (P. 413) Brake fluid At the correct level? (P. 411) Engine coolant At the correct level? (P. 409) Engine oil At the correct level? (P. 406) Exhaust system No fumes or strange sounds? Radiator/condenser/hoses Not blocked with foreign matter? (P. 411) Washer fluid At the correct level? 4 Maintenance and care Battery (P. 416) 393 4-2. Maintenance Vehicle interior Items 394 Check points Accelerator pedal • Moves smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching)? Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism • Can the vehicle be held securely on an incline with the shift lever in P? Brake pedal • Moves smoothly? • Does it have appropriate clearance and correct amount of free play? Brakes • Not pull to one side when applied? • Loss of brake effectiveness? • Spongy feeling brake pedal? • Pedal almost touches floor? Head restraints • Move smoothly and lock securely? Indicators/buzzers • Function properly? Lights • Do all the lights come on? • Headlights aimed correctly? (P. 452) Parking brake • Moves smoothly? • Can hold the vehicle securely on an incline? Seat belts • Does the seat belt system operate smoothly? • Are the belts undamaged? Seats • Do the seat controls operate properly? 4-2. Maintenance Items Steering wheel Check points • Moves smoothly? • Has correct free play? • No strange noises? Vehicle exterior Items Check points Door/trunk • Operates smoothly? Engine hood • The lock system works properly? Fluid leaks • Is there any leakage after parking? Tire • Inflation pressure is correct? • Tire surfaces not worn or damaged? • Wheel nuts are not loose? 4 ■ If the engine is running Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks. 395 Maintenance and care CAUTION 4-2. Maintenance Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system. ■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle. ■ Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test: ● When the battery is disconnected or discharged Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set. ● When the fuel tank cap is loose The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test. ■ When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driving trips The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times. ■ If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing. 396 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Do-it-yourself service precautions If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure as given in these sections. Items Battery condition Brake fluid level (P. 413) • Warm water • Baking soda • Grease • Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts) (P. 411) • FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid • Rag or paper towel • Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid) (P. 409) • “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. For the U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. For Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. • Funnel (used only for adding engine coolant) 397 4 Maintenance and care Engine coolant level Parts and tools 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Items Parts and tools Engine oil level (P. 406) • “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent • Rag or paper towel, funnel (used only for adding engine oil) Fuses (P. 438) • Fuse with same amperage rating as original Headlight aim (P. 452) • Phillips-head screwdriver Radiator and condenser (P. 411) 398  Tire inflation pressure (P. 428) • Tire pressure gauge • Compressed air source Washer fluid (P. 416) • Water washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use) • Funnel 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions. ■ When working on the engine compartment: ● Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt. ● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot. ● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine compartment. ● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable. ● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid. ■ When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille: ■ Safety glasses Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in the eyes. NOTICE ■ If you remove the air cleaner filter Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air. 399 4 Maintenance and care Be sure the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is OFF. With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (P. 411) 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Hood Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood. STEP 1 Pull the hood release lever. The hood will pop up slightly. STEP 2 Lift the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood. CAUTION ■ Pre-driving check Check that the hood is fully closed and locked. If the hood is not locked properly it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury. 400 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Positioning a floor jack When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury. ■ Front Jack point Oil pan* *: Take care when positioning a floor jack, as it is easy to mistake the engine oil pan for the jack point. ■ Rear 4 Maintenance and care Jack point 401 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ When raising your vehicle: Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or serious injury. ● Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as the one shown in the illustration. ● When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with the jack. ● Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle. ● Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported only by the floor jack. ● Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level surface. ● Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack. ● Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the shift lever in P. ● Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point. Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack. ● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle. ● When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the floor jack. 402 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Engine compartment 4 Washer fluid tank (P. 416) Electric cooling fans Condenser (P. 411) Radiator (P. 411) Engine coolant reservoir (P. 409) Maintenance and care Battery (P. 413) Engine oil level dipstick (P. 406) Engine oil filler cap (P. 406) Brake fluid reservoir (P. 411) Fuse boxes (P. 438) 403 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Engine compartment cover ■ Removing the engine compartment cover Front Outside * *: Using a tool, turn the nut until the engine compartment cover can be removed. 404 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Installing the clips and nut * Press the tip of the clip against a hard surface, such as a desk, to allow the center part of the clip to be pushed up. Insert *: Push it down as far as it will go. Press NOTICE ■ After installing an engine compartment cover Make sure that the cover is securely installed in its original position. 4 Maintenance and care 405 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Engine oil With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick. ■ Checking the engine oil STEP 1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and turning it off, wait more than five minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine. Hold a rag under the end and pull STEP 2 the dipstick out. STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 6 406 Wipe the dipstick clean. Reinsert the dipstick fully. Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level. Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully. Low Full 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Adding engine oil If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine. Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil. Engine oil selection Oil quantity (Low  Full) Items STEP 2 STEP 3 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.) 4 Clean funnel Maintenance and care STEP 1 P. 522 Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise. Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick. Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise. 407 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Engine oil consumption A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil maintenance intervals. ● When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after replacing the engine ● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used ● When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently ● When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through heavy traffic CAUTION ■ Used engine oil ● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water. ● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal. ● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children. 408 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance NOTICE ■ To prevent serious engine damage Check the oil level on a regular basis. ■ When replacing the engine oil ● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components. ● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged. ● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle. ● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened. Engine coolant The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold. Reservoir cap “FULL” “LOW” 4 409 Maintenance and care If the level is on or below the “LOW” line, add coolant up to the “FULL” line. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing Visually check the radiator, hoses, coolant reservoir cap, drain cock and water pump. If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system. ■ Coolant selection Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high-quality ethylene glycolbased non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Enabled: -31F [-35C]) Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Enabled: -44F [-42C]) For more details about engine coolant, contact your Lexus dealer. CAUTION ■ When the engine is hot Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap. The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns. NOTICE ■ When adding engine coolant Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label. ■ If you spill coolant Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint. 410 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Radiator and condenser Check the radiator and condenser, and clear any foreign objects. If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. CAUTION ■ When the engine is hot Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns. Brake fluid ■ Checking fluid level The brake fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the tank. 4 Maintenance and care 411 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Adding fluid Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items. Fluid type Items FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid Clean funnel ■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid. CAUTION ■ When filling the reservoir Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor. NOTICE ■ If the fluid level is low or high It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high. If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem. 412 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Battery Check the battery as follows. ■ Battery exterior Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps. Terminals Hold-down clamp Ground cable 4 Check that the level is between “UPPER LEVEL” and “LOWER LEVEL”. “UPPER LEVEL” “LOWER LEVEL” If the fluid level is at or below “LOWER LEVEL”, add distilled water. 413 Maintenance and care ■ Checking battery fluid 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Adding distilled water Low STEP 1 STEP 2 O.K. Remove the vent plug. Add distilled water. If the “UPPER LEVEL” line cannot be seen, check the fluid level by looking directly at the cell. STEP 3 Put the vent plug back on and close securely. ■ Before recharging When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, before recharging: ● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable. ● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the battery. ■ After recharging/reconnecting the battery In some cases, the engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system. STEP 1 Shift the shift lever to P, and turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. STEP 2 Open and close any of the doors. STEP 3 Start the engine. (If the engine does not start first time, repeat the procedure.) If the engine will not start even after multiple attempts at the above method, contact your Lexus dealer. 414 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ Chemicals in the battery A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the battery: ● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools. ● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery. ● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes. ● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte. ● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery. ● Keep children away from the battery. ■ Where to safely charge the battery Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation. 4 ■ How to recharge the battery ■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte ● If electrolyte gets in your eyes Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility. ● If electrolyte gets on your skin Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately. ● If electrolyte gets on your clothes It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary. ● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately. 415 Maintenance and care Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance NOTICE ■ When recharging the battery Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off. Washer fluid If any washer does not work or the warning message appears on the multi-information display, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid. CAUTION ■ When adding washer fluid Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc. NOTICE ■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid. Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces. ■ Diluting washer fluid Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary. Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle. 416 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Tires Replace tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and tread wear. ■ Checking tires New tread Treadwear indicator Worn tread The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the “TWI” or “ ” marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire. ■ The tire pressure warning system Your Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 472, 481) 4 When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed. When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (P. 420) 417 Maintenance and care Installing tire inflation pressure warning valves and transmitters 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Initializing the tire pressure warning system ■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized when the tire inflation pressure is changed (such as when changing traveling speed.) When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure. ■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system To initialize the system, use the satellite switch. (P. 348) STEP 1 Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF. While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed. STEP 2 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (P. 527) Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level. STEP 3 418 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance STEP 4 The tire inflation pressure initialization setting display Continue to press “” or “” until the initialization setting display appears. It may take several minutes to complete the setting. Wait for several minutes before turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF if necessary. Recording tire inflation pressure settings Press and hold the “ON/OFF” button until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly 3 times to indicate that the initial setting is complete. STEP 5 419 4 Maintenance and care Wait for a few minutes with the IGNITION ON mode, and then turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Registering and selecting ID codes To select tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes, use the satellite switch. (P. 348) ■ Registering ID codes 2 sets of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes can be registered. Once a second set of tires is registered at “2ND”, you can switch between tire set settings simply by pressing the “ON/OFF” button. There are 2 settings: “MAIN” position: The ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter on the tires originally installed on the vehicle is registered. “2ND” position: The ID code is not registered. When you replace a new set of tires, purchase tire pressure warning valves and transmitters from your Lexus dealer and have the new ID code registered by your Lexus dealer. 420 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Selecting ID codes When replacing tires, make sure to select the ID code set that matches the new tire set. If the ID code is set to the wrong tire setting, the tire pressure warning system will not operate properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction. Tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID code settings display Press “” or “” repeatedly until the setting display appears. Switching ID codes Press the “ON/OFF” button to switch between “MAIN” and “2ND” ID codes. 4 Maintenance and care 421 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires Tires should be replaced if: ● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric or bulges indicating internal damage ● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer. ■ Replacing tires and wheels If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction. ■ Tire life Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious. ■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) The effectiveness of snow tires is lost. ■ Tire rotation It is not possible to rotate the tires, as the front and rear tire sizes are different. ■ Tire replacement P. 433 ■ Low profile tires Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather conditions. 422 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Maximum load of tire Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater. For the GAWR, see the Certification Label. For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. (P. 532) ■ Tire types 1 Summer tires Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires. All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving. 3 Snow tires For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 218) 423 Maintenance and care 2 All season tires 4 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system Initialize the tires with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level. ■ If you push the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again. ■ When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light does not blink 3 times and the setting message does not appear on the multi-information display. ● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for about 20 minutes. ■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks. 424 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Tire pressure warning system certification FCC ID: PAXPMV107J FCC ID: HYQ13BCE For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 425 4 Maintenance and care L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ When inspecting or replacing tires Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns. Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear. ● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus. ● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires). ● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires. ■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system Do not press the satellite switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal. 426 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance NOTICE ■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and tire valve caps ● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly. ● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck. ■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 417) ■ Driving on rough roads Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot holes. These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body. Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when receiving impact from the road surface. Therefore pay attention to the following: ● Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may be damaged more severely. ● Avoid pot holes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Failure to do so may lead to severe tire and wheel damage. ■ If tire inflation pressure becomes low while driving Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined. 427 Maintenance and care ■ Low profile tires 4 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Tire inflation pressure ■ Tire inflation pressure The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. (P. 527) 428 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Inspection and adjustment procedure Tire valve Tire pressure gauge STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 ■ Tire inflation pressure check interval You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. Do not forget to check the spare. 429 4 Maintenance and care STEP 6 Remove the tire valve cap. Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve. Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge. If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended levels, adjust the pressure. If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower. After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage. Reinstall the tire valve cap. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following: ● Reduced fuel efficiency ● Reduced driving comfort and tire life ● Reduced safety ● Damage to the drive train If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus dealer. ■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following: ● Check only when the tires are cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading. ● Always use a tire pressure gauge. The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling. ● Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving. ● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced. 430 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury. ● Excessive wear ● Uneven wear ● Poor handling ● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires ● Poor sealing of the tire bead ● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation ● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards NOTICE 4 ■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure 431 Maintenance and care Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps. Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them as soon as possible. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Wheels If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling control. ■ Wheel selection When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and inset *. Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer. *: Conventionally referred to as “offset”. Lexus does not recommend using: ● Wheels of different sizes or types ● Used wheels ● Bent wheels that have been straightened ■ Aluminum wheel precautions ● Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels. ● When repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km). ● Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels. ■ When replacing wheels The wheels of your Lexus are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 418) 432 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Tire and wheel replacement (if equipped) Each tire and wheel is designed only for its original position on the vehicle. Therefore, when replacing tires and wheels make sure that they are fitted in the position indicated on the reverse side of the wheel. “FR”: Front right-hand side “FL”: Front left-hand side “RR”: Rear right-hand side “RL”: Rear left-hand side CAUTION ■ When replacing wheels ● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ Replacing tire inflation pressure warning valves and transmitters ● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer. ● Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle. Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with nongenuine wheels. 433 Maintenance and care ● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. 4 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Air conditioning filter The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency. ■ Removal method STEP 1 Set the air conditioning system to recirculated mode. (P. 224) The air conditioning filter case cannot be removed with the system in the outside air mode. STEP 2 STEP 3 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF. Open the glove box. Lift and remove the partition. STEP 4 Remove the filter cover. STEP 5 Remove the filter case. 434 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Replacement method Remove the air conditioning filter from the filter case and replace it with a new one. The “UP” marks shown on the filter and the filter case should be pointing up. ■ Checking interval Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner's Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.) The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary. NOTICE ■ When using the air conditioning system Make sure that a filter is always installed. Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system. 435 Maintenance and care ■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically 4 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Electronic key battery Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged. ■ You will need the following items: ● Flathead screwdriver ● Small Phillips-head screwdriver ● Lithium battery (CR1632) ■ Replacing the battery STEP 1 Take out the mechanical key. STEP 2 Remove the cover. STEP 3 Remove the depleted battery. Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up. 436 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ If the electronic key battery is discharged The following symptoms may occur. ● The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will not function properly. ● The operational range is reduced. ■ Use a CR1632 lithium battery ● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, jewelers, or camera stores. ● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Lexus dealer. ● Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws. ■ When the card key battery needs to be replaced (Canada only) The battery for the card key is available only at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus dealer can replace the battery for you. CAUTION 4 ■ Removed battery and other parts NOTICE ■ For normal operation after replacing the battery Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. ● Always work with dry hands. Moisture may cause the battery to rust. ● Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control. ● Do not bend either of the battery terminals. 437 Maintenance and care These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking. Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Checking and replacing fuses If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary. Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF. STEP 2 Engine compartment (type B): Remove the engine compartment cover. (P. 404) STEP 3 Open the fuse box cover. Engine compartment (type A) Push the tabs in and lift the lid off. STEP 1 Engine compartment (type B) Push the tabs in and lift the lid off. 438 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Driver's side instrument panel Remove the lid. Passenger's side instrument panel Remove the lid. 4 STEP 5 After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings” (P. 442) for details about which fuse to check. Remove the fuse with the pullout tool. 439 Maintenance and care STEP 4 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Check if the fuse has blown. Type A STEP 6 Normal fuse Blown fuse Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid. Type B Normal fuse Blown fuse Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid. Type C Normal fuse Blown fuse Contact your Lexus dealer. 440 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Type D Normal fuse Blown fuse Contact your Lexus dealer. Removing the front controller (engine compartment: type B) Lift the lid off while pushing the tabs on either side. 4 Maintenance and care 441 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse layout and amperage ratings ■ Engine compartment (type A) Fuse 442 Ampere Circuit 1 ALT-S 7.5 A Charging system 2 TURN-HAZ 15 A Emergency flashers, turn signals 3 IG2 MAIN 20 A IG2, IGN, GAUGE 4 RAD NO. 2 30 A Audio system 5 D/C CUT 20 A DOME, MPX-B 6 RAD NO. 1 30 A Audio system 7 MPX-B 10 A Headlights, front fog lights, parking lights, windshield washer, horns, power door lock system, power windows, power seats, electric tilt and telescopic steering column, meters and gauges, smart access system with push-button start, outside rear view mirrors, air conditioning system 8 DOME 10 A Interior lights, meters and gauges, front footwell lights 9 CDS 10 A Electric cooling fans 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse Ampere Circuit 10 E/G-B 60 A FR CTRL-B, ETCS, A/F, STR LOCK, INJ2, TEL 11 P/I-B 60 A EFI, F/PMP, INJ 12 ABS 1 50 A VDIM 13 RH J/B-B 30 A FR DOOR RH, RR DOOR RH, AM2 14 VVT 40 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system 15 MAIN 30 A H-LP R LWR, H-LP L LWR, headlight low beams 16 STARTER 30 A Smart access system with push-button start 17 LH J/B-B 30 A FR DOOR LH, RR DOOR LH, SECURITY 18 EPS 80 A Electric power steering 19 ALT 180 A LH J/B-AM, E/G-AM, HEATER, FAN1, FAN2, DEFOG, RH J/B-AM, ABS 2 80 A S/ROOF, FR P/SEAT LH, TV NO.1, A/C, F/OPN, PSB, FR WIP, H-LP LVL, LH-IG, ECU-IG LH, PANEL, TAIL, MIR HTR, TV NO. 2, FR S/HTR LH LH J/B-AM 21 RH J/B-AM 80 A OBD, STOP SW, TI&TE, FR P/SEAT RH, RAD NO. 3, ECU-IG RH, RH-IG, FR S/HTR RH, ACC, CIG, PWR OUTLET 22 ABS2 30 A VDIM 23 DEFOG 50 A Rear window defogger Maintenance and care 20 4 443 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse Ampere Circuit 24 FAN2 40 A Electric cooling fans 25 FAN1 40 A Electric cooling fans 26 HEATER 50 A CDS, air conditioning system 27 E/G-AM 60 A H-LP CLN, FR CTRL AM, DEICER 444 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Engine compartment (type B) Fuse Ampere Circuit 1 SPARE 30 A Spare fuse 2 SPARE 25 A Spare fuse 3 SPARE 10 A Spare fuse 4 FR CTRL-B 25 A HORN, H-LP HI 5 A/F 15 A Exhaust system 6 ETCS 10 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system 7 TEL 10 A TEL 4 INJ2 25 A 9 STR LOCK 25 A Steering lock system 10 H-LP CLN 30 A Headlight cleaner 11 DEICER 25 A Windshield wiper de-icer 12 FR CTRL-AM 30 A FR FOG, WASHER, FR TAIL 445 Maintenance and care 8 Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse Ampere Circuit 13 IG2 10 A Ignition system 14 EFI NO. 2 10 A Fuel system, exhaust system, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system 15 H-LP R LWR 15 A Headlight low beam (right) 16 H-LP L LWR 15 A Headlight low beam (left) 17 F/PMP 25 A Fuel system 18 EFI 25 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, EFI NO. 2 19 INJ 25 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system 20 H-LP UPR 20 A Headlight high beams 21 HORN 10 A Horns 22 WASHER 20 A Windshield washer 23 FR TAIL 10 A Parking lights, side marker lights 24 FR FOG 15 A Front fog lights 446 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Driver’s side instrument panel Fuse Ampere 1 FR P/SEAT LH 30 A Power seat 2 A/C 7.5 A Air conditioning system 3 MIR HTR 15 A Outside rear view mirror defoggers 4 TV NO. 1 10 A Display 5 FUEL OPEN 10 A Fuel filler door opener 6 TV NO. 2 7.5 A 7 PSB 30 A Pre-collision seat belt 8 S/ROOF 25 A Moon roof 9 TAIL 10 A Tail lights, license plate lights, rear side marker lights Switch illumination, air conditioning system, display, cigarette lighter illumination, shift lever light, instrument panel lights PANEL 7.5 A 11 RR FOG 7.5 A 12 ECU-IG LH 10 A 4 Cruise control, air conditioning system, electric power steering, shift lock system, moon roof, tire inflation pressure warning system 447 Maintenance and care 10 Circuit 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse Ampere Circuit 13 FR S/HTR LH 15 A Seat heaters 14 RR DOOR LH 20 A Power windows 15 FR DOOR LH 20 A Power windows, outside rear view mirror (left) 16 SECURITY 7.5 A Smart access system with push-button start 17 H-LP LVL 7.5 A Automatic headlight leveling system 18 LH-IG 10 A Charging system, headlight cleaner, rear window defogger, electric cooling fans, emergency flashers, turn signal lights, back-up lights, stop lights, outside rear view mirror defoggers, seat belts, intuitive parking assist, air conditioning system 19 FR WIP 30 A Windshield wipers 448 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Passenger’s side instrument panel Fuse Ampere Circuit 1 FR P/SEAT RH 30 A Power seat 2 DOOR DL 15 A 3 OBD 7.5 A On-board diagnosis system STOP SW 7.5 A 5 TI & TE 20 A Electric tilt and telescopic steering column 6 RAD NO. 3 10 A Audio system 7 GAUGE 7.5 A Meters and gauges 8 IGN 10 A SRS airbag system, stop lights, steering lock system, fuel system, front passenger occupant classification system 7.5 A Clock, air conditioning system, audio system, navigation system, display, outside rear view mirrors, smart access system with push-button start, glove box light, console box light 9 ACC 449 4 Maintenance and care 4 Stop lights, VDIM, shift lock system, multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, smart access system with pushbutton start 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse Ampere Circuit 10 CIG 15 A Cigarette lighter 11 PWR OUTLET 15 A Power outlet 12 RR DOOR RH 20 A Power windows 13 FR DOOR RH 20 A Power windows, outside rear view mirrors 14 AM2 7.5 A Smart access system with push-button start 15 RH-IG 7.5 A Seat belts, intuitive parking assist, automatic transmission, seat heaters, windshield wiper de-icer 16 FR S/HTR RH 15 A Seat heaters 10 A Power seats, smart access system with push-button start, outside rear view mirrors, VDIM, air conditioning system, pre-collision seat belt, electric tilt and telescopic steering, power windows, navigation system, headlights, front fog lights, parking lights, license plate lights, windshield washer 17 450 ECU-IG RH 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ After a fuse is replaced ● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. (P. 454) ● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ■ If there is an overload in the circuits The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage. CAUTION ■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury. ● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse. 4 ● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent. Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix. NOTICE ■ Before replacing fuses Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer. 451 Maintenance and care ● Do not modify the fuses or the fuse box. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Headlight aim ■ Removing the engine compartment cover. P. 404 ■ Vertical movement adjusting bolts Adjustment bolt A Adjustment bolt B ■ Before checking the headlight aim STEP 1 Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gas and the area around the headlight is not deformed. STEP 2 Park the vehicle on level ground. STEP 3 Sit in the driver’s seat. STEP 4 Bounce the vehicle several times. ■ Adjusting the headlight aim Turn bolt A in either direction STEP 1 using a Phillips-head screwdriver. Remember the turning direction and the number of turns. 452 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance STEP 2 Turn bolt B the same number of turns and in the same direction as step 1 using a Phillips-head screwdriver. If the headlight cannot be adjusted using this procedure, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer to adjust the headlight aim. 4 Maintenance and care 453 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Light bulbs You may replace the following bulbs yourself. For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus dealer. ■ Preparing a replacement light bulb Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (P. 528) ■ Bulb locations Rear turn signal light Back-up light Replacing light bulbs ■ Back-up lights STEP 1 454 Open the trunk door and remove the cover clips. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance STEP 2 STEP 3 Partly remove the cover. Remove the wire harness and turn the bulb base counterclockwise. Remove the light bulb. 4 ■ Rear turn signal lights Open the trunk door and remove the cover. STEP 2 Remove the connector and turn the bulb base counterclockwise. 455 Maintenance and care STEP 1 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance STEP 3 Remove the light bulb. ■ Bulbs other than the above If any of the bulbs listed below has burnt out, have your Lexus dealer replace it. ● Headlight low and high beams (discharge bulbs) ● Headlight high beams ● Front fog lights ● Front turn signal lights ● Front side marker lights ● Stop/tail lights ● Tail lights ● Rear side marker lights ● High mounted stoplight ● License plate lights ● Daytime running lights/parking lights 456 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction. ● Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens. ● Water has built up inside the headlight. ■ Discharge headlights If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on, or may go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is restored. ■ LED tail lights, stop/tail lights, daytime running lights/parking lights and high mounted stoplight The tail lights, stop/tail lights, daytime running lights/parking lights and high mounted stoplight consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light replaced. 4 Maintenance and care 457 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ Replacing light bulbs ● Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the lights. The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns. ● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by the plastic or metal portion. If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack. ● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens. ● Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam headlight bulbs, connectors, power supply circuits, or related components. Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death. ■ Discharge headlights ● Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing discharge headlights (including light bulbs). ● Do not touch the high-intensity discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when the headlights are turned on. An extremely high voltage of 20000 V will be discharged and could result in serious injury or death by electric shock. ■ To prevent damage or fire Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked. 458 When trouble arises 5-1. Essential information Emergency flashers............... 460 If your vehicle needs to be towed ....................................... 461 If you think something is wrong ...................................... 467 Fuel pump shut off system ..................................... 468 5 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... ................................. 469 If a warning message is displayed................................. 479 If you have a flat tire............... 493 If the engine will not start ......................................... 502 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P ....................... 503 If you lose your keys .............. 504 If the electronic key does not operate properly.......... 505 If the vehicle battery is discharged ............................ 508 If your vehicle overheats ....... 511 If the vehicle becomes stuck......................................... 514 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency............................. 515 459 5-1. Essential information Emergency flashers Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is involved in an accident. Press the switch to flash all the turn signal lights. To turn them off, press the switch once again. NOTICE ■ To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the engine is not running. 460 5-1. Essential information If your vehicle needs to be towed If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flat bed truck. Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws. If towing from the rear, the vehicle’s front wheels and axles must be in good condition. (P. 465) If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck. Before towing The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Lexus dealer before towing. ● The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move. ● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound. Emergency towing Towing eyelet 461 5 When trouble arises If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet. This should only be attempted on hard, surfaced roads for short distances at low speeds. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition. 5-1. Essential information ■ Emergency towing procedure STEP 1 Release the parking brake. STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to N. STEP 3 Put the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY mode (engine off) or IGNITION ON mode (engine running). CAUTION ■ Caution while towing ● Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet and the cables or chains. Always be cautious of the surroundings and other vehicles while towing. ● If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult. NOTICE ■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission Never tow this vehicle from the rear with four wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the transmission. 462 5-1. Essential information Installing the towing eyelet STEP 1 Remove the eyelet cover using a flathead screwdriver. To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and the vehicle body, as shown in the illustration. STEP 2 Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand. STEP 3 Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a wheel nut wrench. 5 When trouble arises ■ Location of the emergency towing eyelet P. 493 463 5-1. Essential information CAUTION ■ Installing the towing eyelet to the vehicle Make sure that the towing eyelet is installed securely. If not securely installed, the towing eyelet may come loose during towing. This may lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death. Towing with a sling-type truck NOTICE ■ To prevent body damage Do not tow with a sling- type truck, either from the front or rear. 464 5-1. Essential information Towing with a wheel lift-type truck From the front Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels. From the rear Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the ACCESSORY mode so that the steering wheel is unlocked. 5 ■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground. ■ To prevent damaging the vehicle ● Do not tow the vehicle from the rear with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight. ● When raising the vehicle from the rear, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed from the rear. 465 When trouble arises NOTICE 5-1. Essential information Using a flat bed truck If your Lexus is transported by a flat bed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration. If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45. Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged. 466 5-1. Essential information If you think something is wrong If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. ■ Visible symptoms ● Fluid leaks under the vehicle (Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.) ● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear ● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal ■ Audible symptoms ● Changes in exhaust sound ● Excessive tire squeal when cornering ● Strange noises related to the suspension system ● Pinging or other noises related to the engine ■ Operational symptoms ● Engine missing, stumbling or running rough ● Appreciable loss of power 5 ● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking ● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor 467 When trouble arises ● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road 5-1. Essential information Fuel pump shut off system To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine. Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated. STEP 1 STEP 2 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode or OFF. Restart the engine. NOTICE ■ Before starting the engine Inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine. 468 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous. The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. Warning light Warning light/Details Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)* (U.S.A.) • Low brake fluid • Malfunction in the brake booster system This light also comes on when the parking brake is not (Canada) released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released the system is operating normally. *: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer: P. 483 5 When trouble arises 469 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Stop the vehicle immediately. The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. Warning light Warning light/Details Charging system warning light Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. Warning light Warning light/Details Malfunction indicator lamp (U.S.A.) Indicates a malfunction in: • The electronic engine control system; (Canada) • The electronic throttle control system; or • The electronic automatic transmission control system. SRS warning light Indicates a malfunction in: • The SRS airbag system; or • The seat belt pretensioner system. 470 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning light Warning light/Details ABS warning light Indicates a malfunction in: • The ABS; or (Canada) • The brake assist system. (U.S.A.) Electric power steering system warning light Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system. Pre-collision system warning light (if equipped) Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system. The warning light will operate as follows, even when the system is not malfunctioning: • The light will flash quickly when the system is operating. (P. 207) • The light will flash when the pre-collision braking is disabled. (P. 208) • The light will flash when the system cannot temporarily be used. (P. 483) Slip indicator Indicates a malfunction in: • The VSC system; • The TRAC system; or • The hill-start assist control system 5 When the voltage is low or drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on. 471 When trouble arises ■ Electric power steering system warning light 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION ■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on The steering wheel may become extremely heavy. If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold firmly and operate it using more force than usual. Follow the correction procedures. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light turns off. Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure Open door warning light (warning buzzer)*1 Indicates that a door or the trunk is not fully closed. Check that all doors and the trunk are closed. Low fuel level warning light Remaining fuel Refuel the vehicle. (Approximately 2.9 gal. [11 L, 2.4 Imp. gal.] or less) (On the instrument cluster) (On the center panel) 472 Driver’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*2 Warns the driver to fasten his/her seat belt. Fasten the seat belt. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Fasten the seat belt. (warning buzzer)*2 Warns the front passenger to fasten his/her seat belt. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure Tire pressure warning light When the light comes on: Low tire inflation pressure such as • Natural causes (P. 474) • Flat tire (P. 493) Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. The light will turn off after a few minutes. In case the light does not turn off even if the tire inflation pressure is adjusted, have the system checked by your Lexus dealer. When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute: Have the system checked by Malfunction in the tire presyour Lexus dealer. sure warning system (P. 475) 5 P. 479 When trouble arises Master warning light A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction. *1: Open door warning buzzer: P. 483 *2: Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt buzzer: The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds. 473 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving First check the following: ● Is the fuel tank empty? If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately. ● Is the fuel tank cap loose? If it is, tighten it securely. The lamp will go off after taking several driving trips. If the lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. ■ Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder and warning buzzer ● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound, even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat. ● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may not operate properly. ■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire pressure warning light. ■ The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes). ■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after a few minutes. 474 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions: (When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.) ● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used. ● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer. ● If a different set of tires has been selected using the satellite switch. ● If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or higher. ● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby. ● If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle. ● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular, around the wheels or wheel housings. ● If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used. (Even if you use Lexus wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.) ■ If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, have it checked by your Lexus dealer. ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer 5 The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled. (Customizable features P. 544) When trouble arises 475 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION ■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury. ● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately. ● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus dealer. ● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes. ■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately. 476 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION ■ Maintenance of the tires Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly. 477 5 When trouble arises Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency NOTICE ■ Precaution when installing a different tire When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly. 478 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If a warning message is displayed If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform the following actions: Master warning light The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display. Multi-information display If any of the warning lights turns on again after performing the following actions, contact your Lexus dealer. 5 When trouble arises 479 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Stop the vehicle immediately. A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. Warning message (for U.S.A.) Details Indicates an abnormal engine oil pressure. The warning light may turn on if the engine oil pressure is too low. (for Canada) (Flashing) (Flashing) 480 Indicates that the engine oil temperature is too high. The engine oil temperature gauge display will also flash. (P. 154) 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. Warning message Details Indicates a malfunction in the headlight leveling system. Indicates a malfunction in the steering lock system. (Flashing) 5 When trouble arises Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system. (If equipped) 481 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message Details Indicates an intuitive parking assist malfunction. The malfunctioning assist-sensor is shown flashing on the display. (If equipped) (Flashing and then continuously on) (Flashing) (If equipped) 482 Indicates a malfunction in the radar cruise control system. Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Follow the correction procedures. A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message turns off. Warning message Details Correction procedure Indicates that one or more of the doors is not fully closed. The system also indicates which doors are not fully closed. flashes and a Make sure that all of the doors are closed. buzzer sounds to indicate that one or more of the doors is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]). 5 When trouble arises Indicates that the hood is not fully closed. flashes and a buzzer sounds to indiClose the hood. cate that hood is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]). 483 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message Details Correction procedure Indicates that the trunk is not fully closed. flashes and a buzzer sounds to indiClose the trunk. cate that trunk is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]). (Flashing) (If equipped) Indicates that the moon roof is not fully closed (with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and the driver’s door opened). Close the moon roof. Indicates that the parking brake is still engaged. flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]). (Flashing) 484 Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high Release the parking brake. P. 150 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message Details Correction procedure Indicates that the washer Add washer fluid. fluid level is low. Indicates that engine oil level is low. (U.S.A. only) 5 If necessary, perform maintenance. When trouble arises Indicates that all maintenance according to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule* should be performed soon. Check the level of engine oil, and add if necessary. This message may appear if the vehicle is stopped on a slope. Move the vehicle to a level surface and check to see if the message disappears. Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) after the maintenance data has been reset. 485 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message Details Correction procedure Indicates that all maintenance is required to correspond to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule*. (U.S.A. only) (Flashing) Perform the necessary Comes on approximately maintenance. Please reset 5000 miles (8000 km) the maintenance data after the maintenance is after the maintenance performed (P. 392) data has been reset. (The indicator will not work properly unless the maintenance data has been reset.) Indicates that the precollision system is not currently functional. • Clean the grille and the sensor. • Wait until the precollision system cools down. Indicates that intuitive parking assist is dirty or covered with ice. Clean the sensor. (If equipped) (If equipped) 486 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message Details (Flashing and then continuously on) Indicates that the radar cruise control sensor is dirty or covered with ice. Clean the sensor. Indicates that the radar cruise control system is unable to judge vehicleto-vehicle distance. • Switch the driving mode to either the normal or “Sport” mode. • If the windshield wipers are on, turn them off or set them to either the intermittent or the slow mode. (Flashing) Correction procedure (If equipped) (Flashing and then continuously on) (Flashing) (Flashing) (If equipped) Indicates that your vehicle is nearing the vehicle ahead (in radar cruise mode). Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes. 487 When trouble arises (If equipped) 5 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message (Flashing quickly) (If equipped) Details Correction procedure Indicates that there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, or that the pre-collision braking function is operating. Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes. *: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle. ■ Warning light display in dynamic radar cruise mode (if equipped) In the following cases, the warning light may not be displayed even if vehicle-tovehicle distance decreases. ● When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle ● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed ● Immediately after cruise control speed is set ● At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed 488 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Follow the correction procedures. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light turns off. Interior Exterior buzzer buzzer Once Warning message  (Comes on for 10 seconds.) (Flashing) Correction procedure Indicates that an attempt was made to start the engine without the electronic key being present, or the electronic key was not functioning normally. Start the engine with the electronic key present.* Indicates that a door other than the driver’s door has been opened and closed with the “ENGINE Confirm the locaSTART STOP” tion of the elecswitch in any tronic key. mode other than OFF and the electronic key has been taken out of the detection area. 489 5 When trouble arises Once 3 times Details 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Interior Exterior buzzer buzzer Details Correction procedure Once 3 times Indicates that the driver’s door has been opened and closed with the shift lever in P, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in any mode other than OFF and the electronic key has been taken out of the detection area. Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF or confirm the location of the electronic key. Con- Continuous tinuous Indicates that the driver’s door has been opened and closed with the shift lever out of • Shift the shift in P, the lever to P. “ENGINE START • Confirm the STOP” switch in location of the any mode other electronic key. than OFF and the electronic key has been taken out of the detection area. Warning message (Displayed alternately) (Flashing) 490 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Interior Exterior buzzer buzzer Once  Warning message (Comes on for 10 seconds.) Details Correction procedure Indicates that the Replace the batkey battery is low. tery. (P. 436) (Flashing)   (Flashing) Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while applying the brakes. Indicates that the steering lock has not released within 3 seconds of pressing the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch again while turning the steering wheel with the brake pedal depressed. 5 491 When trouble arises   Indicates that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch has been turned twice to ACCESSORY mode without starting the engine when a closed door is opened. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Interior Exterior buzzer buzzer Once  Once  Warning message Details Correction procedure Indicates that the electronic key P. 506 does not operate properly. *: If the engine does not start when the electronic key is inside the vehicle, the electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be difficulties receiving the signal from the key. (P. 36) 492 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If you have a flat tire Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare tire provided. The spare tire can only be used on the front wheels. ■ Before jacking up the vehicle ● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface. ● Set the parking brake. ● Shift the shift lever to P. ● Stop the engine. ● Turn on the emergency flashers. ■ Location of the spare tire, jack and tools Jack Tighten Loosen 5 When trouble arises Tool bag (including towing eyelet) Spare tire Jack handle 493 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Taking out the spare tire STEP 1 Lift up the hook of the panel on the trunk floor. STEP 2 Secure the panel using the hook provided. STEP 3 Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire. 494 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Replacing a flat tire STEP 1 Chock the tires. Flat tire Left-hand side Front Righthand side Left-hand side Rear Righthand side STEP 2 Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn). Turn the tire jack portion “A” by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point. 495 5 When trouble arises STEP 3 Wheel chock positions Behind the rear righthand side tire Behind the rear lefthand side tire In front of the front righthand side tire In front of the front lefthand side tire 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency STEP 4 Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground. STEP 5 Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire. When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface. Installing the spare tire STEP 1 Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface. If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, and the tire may come off the vehicle. 496 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency STEP 2 Tapered portion Disc wheel seat STEP 3 STEP 4 Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount. Tighten the nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat. Lower the vehicle. Firmly tighten each nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration. 5 Tightening torque: 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) When trouble arises STEP 5 Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools. 497 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ The compact spare tire ● The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” on the tire sidewall. Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency. ● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire. (P. 527) ■ When using the compact spare tire As the compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on. ■ After completing the tire change The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 418) 498 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION ■ Using the tire jack Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to the vehicle suddenly falling off the jack. ● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires. ● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire. Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle. ● Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point. ● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. ● Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack. ● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it. ● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack. ● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire. ● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle. Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or near the vehicle may be injured. ■ Replacing a flat tire 5 ● Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while ● Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury. • Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. • Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels. 499 When trouble arises the vehicle is moving. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION ■ When using the compact spare tire ● Remember that your compact spare tire is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle. ● Do not use the compact spare tire as a rear tire. If you have a flat rear tire, replace a front tire with the compact spare tire first and then replace the flat rear tire with the tire removed from the front. ● Do not use more than one compact spare tire simultaneously. ● Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible. ● Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cornering. ■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle. The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury. ■ When the spare tire is installed The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly: ● ABS & brake assist ● VSC ● TRAC ● VDIM ● Navigation system (if equipped) ● Intuitive parking assist (if equipped) ● Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped) ● Cruise control (if equipped) ● PCS (if equipped) ● LSD ● Automatic headlight leveling system 500 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency NOTICE ■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire Do not continue driving with a flat tire. Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair. ■ Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the vehicle The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces. ■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire. Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance. ■ When replacing the tires When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly. ■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters 501 5 When trouble arises When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 417) 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the engine will not start If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are being followed (P. 138), consider each of the following points. ■ The engine will not start even when the starter motor operates normally. One of the following may be the cause of the problem. ● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank. Refuel the vehicle. ● The engine may be flooded. Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting procedures. (P. 138) ■ The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume. One of the following may be the cause of the problem. ● The battery may be discharged. (P. 508) ● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded. ■ The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound. One of the following may be the cause of the problem. ● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected. ● The battery may be discharged. (P. 508) ● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system. (P. 88) ● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system. Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown. 502 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Set the parking brake. Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode. Depress the brake pedal. Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent. Press the shift lock override button. 503 When trouble arises The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed. 5 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If you lose your keys New genuine Lexus keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using the other key and the key number stamped on your key number plate. (P. 28) 504 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the electronic key does not operate properly If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted (P. 36) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be opened or the engine can be started by following the procedure below. Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk and key linked functions Use the mechanical key built in to the electronic keys to operate the doors. (P. 29) Doors STEP 1 Remove the cover on the driver’s door handle. 5 STEP 2 Turning the key rearward unlocks the driver's door. Turning the key once again unlocks the other doors. Opens the windows/moon roof (turn and hold) 505 When trouble arises Locks all the doors Closes the windows/moon roof (turn and hold) Unlocks the door 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency After the operation is completed, reinstall the cover. STEP 3 Hook the upper claw of the cover onto the upper catch on the vehicle side, and then push on the lower side of the cover. Make sure that the lower claw of the cover is securely fastened to the lower catch on the vehicle side. If the cover is not securely attached, it may fall off while driving. Trunk Turn the mechanical key clockwise to open. Starting the engine STEP 1 506 Shift the shift lever to P and apply the brakes. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency STEP 2 Touch the Lexus emblem side of the electronic key to the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. An alarm will sound to indicate that the start function cannot detect the electronic key that is touched to the “ENGINE START STOP” switch if any of the doors is opened and closed while the key is touched to the switch. Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch within 10 seconds after the buzzer sounds, keeping the brake pedal depressed. In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact your Lexus dealer. STEP 3 Shift the shift lever to P and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as you normally do when stopping the engine. ■ Replacing the key battery As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery depletes. (P. 436) ■ Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes Within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. The engine does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is pressed. (P. 139) 507 When trouble arises ■ Stopping the engine 5 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the vehicle battery is discharged The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s battery is discharged. You can call your Lexus dealer or a qualified repair shop. If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Lexus following the steps below. STEP 1 Connecting the jumper cables. Remove the engine cover. Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the illustration. 508 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle. STEP 3 Open and close any of the doors with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. STEP 4 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode, then start the vehicle’s engine. STEP 5 Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order in which they were connected. Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. STEP 2 ■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged The engine cannot be started by push-starting. ■ To prevent battery discharge 5 ● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off. ● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a ■ Charging the battery The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges automatically during driving.) ■ When the battery is removed or discharged Make sure that the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the battery. The key may be locked in the vehicle if the alarm is activated. (P. 91) 509 When trouble arises low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION ■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery. ● Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal. ● Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” terminals. ● Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near the battery. ■ Battery precautions The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery. ● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body. ● Do not lean over the battery. ● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention. Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received. ● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts. ● Do not allow children near the battery. NOTICE ■ When handling jumper cables Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them. 510 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If your vehicle overheats If your engine overheats: STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the automatic air conditioning system. Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood. If you see steam: Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides and then restart the engine. If you do not see steam: Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood. Check to see if the cooling fans are operating. If the fans are operating: Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the engine. If the fans are not operating: Stop the engine immediately and call your local Lexus dealer. After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, check the engine coolant level and inspect the radiator core (radiator) for any leaks. 5 When trouble arises If the engine compartment cover needs to be removed: P. 404 511 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency STEP 5 Add engine coolant if necessary. Water can be used in an emergency measure if engine coolant is unavailable. (P. 523) Have the vehicle checked at your nearest Lexus dealer as soon as possible. ■ Overheating If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating. ● The display on the engine coolant temperature gauge flashes or a loss of power is experienced. ● Steam is coming from under the hood. CAUTION ■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle ● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, causing serious injury such as burns. ● Keep hands and clothing away from the fans and belt while the engine is running. ● Do not loosen the coolant reservoir cap while the engine and radiator are hot. Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released under pressure. 512 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency NOTICE ■ When adding engine coolant Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant. When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine. 5 When trouble arises 513 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the vehicle becomes stuck Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P. Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire. Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide traction under the tires. Restart the engine. Shift the shift lever to the D or R position, release the parking brake and carefully apply the accelerator to free the vehicle. Turn off TRAC and VSC if these functions are hampering your attempts to free the vehicle. ( P. 202) CAUTION ■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution. ■ When shifting the shift lever Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components ● Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine. ● If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may require towing to be freed. 514 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure: STEP 1 Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it. Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to slow the vehicle. STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to N. If the shift lever is shifted to N STEP 3 After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road. STEP 4 Stop the engine. If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N STEP 3 Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible. Stop the engine by pressing and STEP 4 holding the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for 2 consecutive seconds or more, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. 5 STEP 5 When trouble arises Press and hold for 2 seconds or more, or press briefly 3 times or more Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road. CAUTION ■ If the engine has to be turned off while driving Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine. 515 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency 516 Vehicle specifications 6 6-1. Specifications Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) ............... 518 Fuel information..................... 529 Tire information...................... 532 6-2. Customization Customizable features ........ 544 6-3. Initialization Items to initialize .................... 549 517 6-1. Specifications Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) Dimensions and weight Overall length 183.4 in. (4660 mm) Overall width 71.4 in. (1815 mm) Overall height *1 55.7 in. (1415 mm) Wheelbase 107.4 in. (2730 mm) Tread Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants + luggage) Front 61.4 in. (1560 mm) Rear 59.8 in. (1520 mm)*2 60.2 in. (1530 mm)*3 660 lb. (300 kg) *1: Unladen vehicle *2: Vehicles with a rear wheel size of 19 × 9J *3: Vehicles with a rear wheel size of 19 × 9 1/2J 518 6-1. Specifications Vehicle identification ■ Vehicle identification number The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle. This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel and in the engine compartment. This number is also on the Certification Label. 6 Vehicle specifications 519 6-1. Specifications ■ Engine number The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown. 520 6-1. Specifications Engine Model 2UR-GSE Type 8-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline Bore and stroke 3.70 3.52 in. (94.0  89.5 mm) Displacement 303.2 cu. in. (4969 cm3) Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment Fuel Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only Octane rating 91 (Research octane number 96) or higher Fuel tank capacity (Reference) 16.9 gal. (64 L, 14.0 Imp. gal.) 6 Vehicle specifications 521 6-1. Specifications Lubrication system Oil capacity (Drain and refill  reference*) without filter 8.7 qt. (8.2 L, 7.2 Imp. qt.) with filter 9.8 qt. (9.3 L, 8.2 Imp. qt.) *: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when exchanging. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick. ■ Engine oil selection “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity. Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil Recommended viscosity: SAE 5W-30 SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather. Outside temperature 522 If SAE 5W-30 is not available, SAE 10W-30 oil may be used. However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W-30 at the next oil change. 6-1. Specifications Oil viscosity (5W-30 is explained here as an example): • The 5W in 5W-30 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather. • The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions. How to read oil container label: The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use. Cooling system 12.6 qt. (11.9 L, 10.5 Imp. qt.) Coolant type Use either of the following. • “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” • Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology Do not use plain water alone. 523 6 Vehicle specifications Capacity 6-1. Specifications Ignition system Spark plug Make Gap DENSO FK20HBR11 0.043 in. (1.1 mm) NOTICE ■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning the engine. Electrical system Battery Open voltage* at 68F (20C): 12.6 12.8 V Fully charged 12.2 12.4 V Half charged 11.8 12.0 V Discharged (*: Voltage checked 20 minutes after the engine and all the lights are turned off) Charging rates 5 A max. Differential Oil capacity 1.42 qt. (1.35 L, 1.19 Imp. qt.) Oil type and viscosity* “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil LX 75W-85 GL-5” or equivalent *: Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the factory. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent oil of matching quality that satisfies the above specifications. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details. 524 6-1. Specifications Automatic transmission Fluid capacity* 11.6 qt. (11.0 L, 9.7 Imp. qt.) Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS *: The fluid capacity is provided as a reference. If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer. NOTICE Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle. 6 Vehicle specifications 525 6-1. Specifications Brakes Pedal clearance *1 4.3 in. (110 mm) Min. Pedal free play 0.04  0.08 in. (1.0  2.0 mm) Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm) Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm) Parking brake pedal travel *2 7  9 clicks Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 *1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50 kgf) while the engine is running. *2: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.4 lbf (300 N, 30.6 kgf). 526 6-1. Specifications Steering Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm) Tires and wheels Front: 225/40R19 93Y Rear: 255/35R19 96Y Spare: T135/70R18 103M Tire size Front: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)* Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)* Front and rear tire inflation pres- Spare: sure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) (Recommended cold tire inflation *: When driving at high speeds above 100 mph pressure) (160 km/h), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 9.0 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall. Type A Wheel size Wheel nut torque 6 Front wheels: 19  8 1/2J Rear wheels: 19 9 1/2J Spare wheel: 18  4T Vehicle specifications Type B Front wheels: 19  8J Rear wheels: 19 9J Spare wheel: 18  4T 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) 527 6-1. Specifications Light bulbs Light Bulbs Bulb No. W Type 9005 D4S 60 35 D A Front turn signal lights  21 C Front fog lights  55 B Rear turn signal lights  21 C Back-up lights 921 16 E Outer foot lights  5 E Vanity lights  8 E Interior lights Front Rear  5 3 E F Rear overhead courtesy light  3 F Front door courtesy lights  5 E Trunk light  5 F Headlights High beam Low/high beam Exterior Interior A: B: C: D: E: F: 528 D4S discharge bulbs H11 halogen bulbs Wedge base bulbs (amber) HB3 halogen bulbs Wedge base bulbs (clear) Double end bulbs 6-1. Specifications Fuel information Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline. Premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance. If 91 octane cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number 91). Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 91 may result in engine knocking and significantly reduced performance. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should be corrected by refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline. At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada. ■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps. ■ If your engine knocks ● Consult your Lexus dealer. ● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern. ■ Gasoline quality In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer. ● Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be applied worldwide. ● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted. ● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction through better performance. 529 Vehicle specifications ■ Gasoline quality standards 6 6-1. Specifications ■ Lexus recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives ● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid build-up of engine deposits. ● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems, per EPA’s lowest additives concentration program. ● Lexus strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to the official website www.toptiergas.com. ■ Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many areas. Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. ■ Lexus does not recommend blended gasoline DO NOT use gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol. (15% ethanol) (50% ethanol) (85% ethanol) ● Use only gasoline containing a maximum of 10% ethanol. DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that could contain more than 10% ethanol, including from any pump labeled E15, E30, E50, E85 (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 10% ethanol). ● If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87. ● Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol. 530 6-1. Specifications ■ Lexus does not recommend gasoline containing MMT Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service. NOTICE ■ Notice on fuel quality ● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be damaged. ● Do not use leaded gasoline. Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction. ● Do not use gasohol other than that stated here. Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems. ● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than that stated here will cause persistent heavy knocking. At worst, this will lead to engine damage. ■ Fuel-related poor driveability If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel. ■ When refueling with gasohol 6 Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint. Vehicle specifications 531 6-1. Specifications Tire information Typical tire symbols Standard tire Compact spare tire Tire size DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) Location of treadwear indicators Tire ply composition and materials (P. 534) (P. 534) (P. 417) Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire. 532 6-1. Specifications Radial tires or bias-ply tires A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire. TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure. Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 423) (P. 527) This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. Uniform tire quality grading For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows. Summer tire or all season tire (P. 423) An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer tire. “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” (P. 498) A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” molded into its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only. 6 Vehicle specifications 533 6-1. Specifications Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN) DOT symbol* Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire manufacturer's identification mark Tire size code Manufacturer's optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters) Manufacturing week Manufacturing year *: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Tire size ■ Typical tire size information The illustration indicates typical tire size. Tire use (P = Passenger car, T = Temporary use) Section width (millimeters) Aspect ratio (tire height to section width) Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal) Wheel diameter (inches) Load index (2 digits or 3 digits) Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter) 534 6-1. Specifications ■ Tire dimensions Section width Tire height Wheel diameter Tire section names Bead Sidewall Shoulder Tread Belt Inner liner Reinforcing rubber Carcass Rim lines Bead wires Chafer 6 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information. 535 Vehicle specifications This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading. 6-1. Specifications ■ DOT quality grades All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A ■ Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. ■ Traction AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction. 536 6-1. Specifications ■ Temperature A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. Glossary of tire terminology Meaning Cold tire inflation pressure Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition Maximum inflation pressure The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire Recommended inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer. Accessory weight The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not) 537 6 Vehicle specifications Tire related term 6-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of: (a) Curb weight (b) Accessory weight (c) Vehicle capacity weight (d) Production options weight Normal occupant weight 150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1* below Production options weight The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat Rim size designation Rim diameter and width Rim type designation The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or code Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity) The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity 538 6-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning The load on an individual tire that is determined by Vehicle maximum load on distributing to each axle its share of the maximum the tire loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two Weather side The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire Bead The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead Bias ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material 539 6 Vehicle specifications Vehicle normal load on the tire The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing by two 6-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning CT A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire Extra load tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs Innerliner The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire Innerliner separation The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass Intended outboard sidewall (a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Light truck (LT) tire A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Maximum permissible inflation pressure The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated 540 6-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire Overall width The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs Passenger car tire A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less. Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies Pneumatic tire A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load Radial ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Reinforced tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire Section width The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands 541 6 Vehicle specifications Measuring rim 6-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and bead Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall Snow tire A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( on at least one sidewall ) Test rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire Tread That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Tread rib A tread section running circumferentially around a tire Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass Treadwear indicators (TWI) The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing *:Table 1  Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities 542 6-1. Specifications Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle 2 through 4 2 2 in front 5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat 11 through 15 5 2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat 16 through 20 7 2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat 6 Vehicle specifications 543 6-2. Customization Customizable features Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by an authorized Lexus dealership. Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details. Item Smart access system with push-button start (P. 32) Default setting Customized setting Operation signal (Emergency flashers) On Off Operation signal (Buzzer) On Off Driver's door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps All doors unlocked in one step On Off Function Unlocking operation Wireless remote control (P. 43) Automatic door lock function to be activated if door is not opened after being unlocked Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked 544 30 seconds 60 seconds 120 seconds 6-2. Customization Item Wireless remote control (P. 43) Default setting Customized setting Operation signal (Emergency flashers) On Off Operation signal (Buzzer) On Off Door lock buzzer On Off Trunk unlocking function On Off Function Trunk unlocking operation Push and hold Panic function Off Driver's door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps All doors unlocked in one step Speed-detecting automatic door lock function Off On Opening driver's door unlocks all doors Off On Shifting gears to P unlocks all doors On Off Shifting gears to a position other than P locks all doors On Off Auto tilt-away function On Off 6 Vehicle specifications Steering wheel (P. 72) One short push On Unlocking using a key Door lock (P. 46) Push twice 545 6-2. Customization Item Power windows (P. 78) Moon roof (P. 81) Function Default setting Customized setting Linked door lock operation On Off Linked door key operation Open and close Wireless remote control linked operation Off Open only Linked door lock operation On Off Linked door key operation Open and close Lights (P. 168) 546 Close only Open only Close only Linked operation of components when door key is used Slide only Tilt only Wireless remote control linked operation Off Open only Linked operation of components when wireless remote control is used Automatic light control system (P. 166) Open only Light sensor sensitivity Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off after doors are closed Daytime running light system (U.S.A. only) Slide only Off Tilt only Level 3 Level 1 to 5 0 seconds 30 seconds 60 seconds 90 seconds On Off 6-2. Customization Item Windshield wipers and washer (P. 172) Intuitive parking assist (P. 195) Illumination (P. 334) Default setting Customized setting Switching operation when the vehicle is stationary On Off Drip prevention function On Off Time elapsed before the drip prevention function operates Variable depending on the vehicle speed 3 seconds Back sensor operation display and buzzer On Off Level 3 Level 1 to 5 Distance which a sensor detects 4.9 ft. (150 cm) 2.0 ft. (60 cm) Time elapsed before lights turn off 15 seconds Buzzer volume 7.5 seconds 30 seconds Operation when the doors are unlocked On Off Operation after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned OFF On Off Front footwell lights On Off Shift lever light On Off Outer foot lights On Off Vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer On Off 6 Vehicle specifications Seat belt reminder (P. 472) Function 547 6-2. Customization Multi-information display (P. 161) Country Canada 548 Languages English and French 6-3. Initialization Items to initialize The following items must be initialized for normal system operation in cases such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is performed on the vehicle. Item When to initialize Reference Power window After reconnecting or changing the battery P. 78 Maintenance data (U.S.A. only) After the maintenance is performed P. 392 Tire pressure warning system When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed P. 417 6 Vehicle specifications 549 6-3. Initialization 550 For owners 7 Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners..................... 552 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) .............................. 553 SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French) ............................... 555 Headlight aim instructions for Canadian owners (in French) ................................ 564 551 Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Tollfree: 1-800-25-LEXUS). If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov ; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. 552 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual. See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English. Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité ● Déroulez la sangle diagonale de telle sorte qu'elle passe bien sur l'épaule, sans pour autant être en contact avec votre cou ou glisser de votre épaule. ● Placez la sangle abdominale le plus bas possible sur les hanches. ● Réglez la position du dossier de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le plus droit possible et calez-vous bien dans le siège. ● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de sécurité. Guide confort de ceinture de sécurité (sièges arrière) 553 7 For owners Si la sangle diagonale est proche du cou de la personne, faites coulisser le guide de confort de ceinture de sécurité vers l'avant. Entretien et soin ■ Ceintures de sécurité Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède. Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées. ATTENTION ■ Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne sont pas entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. N'utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune garantie de protection de l'occupant en cas d'accident. 554 SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French) The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual. See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in English. Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS frontaux Sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur/sac de sécurité gonflable passager avant SRS Participent à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur et du passager avant contre les chocs avec les éléments de l'habitacle. Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS de genoux Participent à la protection du conducteur et du passager avant. 7 For owners 555 Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS latéraux et rideau Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS latéraux Participent à la protection du haut du corps des occupants aux places avant. Sacs de sécurité gonflables rideau SRS Participe principalement à la protection de la tête des occupants. 556 Composition du système de sacs de sécurité gonflables Prétensionneurs de ceintures de sécurité et limiteurs de force Contacteur de boucle de ceinture de sécurité conducteur Capteur de position du siège conducteur Contacteur de boucle de ceinture de sécurité passager avant Boîtier électronique de sacs de sécurité gonflables Système de classification de l'occupant du siège passager avant (calculateur électronique et capteurs) Capteurs de sacs de sécurité gonflables frontaux 7 For owners Sacs de sécurité gonflables de genoux Sac de sécurité gonflable passager avant Sacs de sécurité gonflables rideau Témoins “AIR BAG ON” et “AIR BAG OFF” Sacs de sécurité gonflables latéraux Capteurs de sacs de sécurité gonflables latéraux et rideau Capteurs de sacs de sécurité gonflables rideau Voyant SRS Sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur 557 Votre véhicule est équipé de SACS DE SÉCURITÉ GONFLABLES INTELLIGENTS (ADVANCED AIRBAGS) conçus selon les normes de sécurité américaines applicables aux véhicules à moteur (FMVSS208). Le boîtier électronique (ECU) des sacs de sécurité gonflables régule le déploiement de ces derniers sur la base des informations qu'il reçoit des capteurs, etc., indiqués ci-dessus dans le schéma illustrant les composants du système. Parmi ces informations figurent la gravité du choc et l'occupation du véhicule par les passagers. Le déploiement rapide des sacs de sécurité gonflables est obtenu au moyen d'une réaction chimique dans les dispositifs pyrotechniques, qui produit un gaz inoffensif permettant d'amortir le mouvement des occupants. 558 ATTENTION ■ Précautions à observer avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS Respectez les précautions suivantes avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables. À défaut, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s'ensuivre. ● Le conducteur et tous les passagers à bord du véhicule doivent porter leur ceinture de sécurité correctement. Les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs de protection complémentaires aux ceintures de sécurité. ● Le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS conducteur se déploie avec une violence considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse voire mortelle si le conducteur se trouve très près du sac de sécurité gonflable. L'autorité fédérale chargée de la sécurité routière aux États-Unis, la NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration) conseille: La zone à risque du sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur se situant dans les premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 à 75 mm) de déploiement, vous disposez d'une confortable marge de sécurité en vous plaçant à 10 in. (250 mm) de votre sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur. Cette distance est à mesurer entre le moyeu du volant de direction et le sternum. Si vous êtes actuellement assis à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de différentes façons: 559 7 For owners • Reculez votre siège autant que vous le permet la longueur de vos jambes (vous devez toujours atteindre confortablement les pédales). • Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège. Bien que la conception des véhicules soit variable, la plupart des conducteurs peuvent s'asseoir à une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), même avec le siège conducteur complètement avancé, en inclinant simplement un peu le dossier du siège. Si vous avez des difficultés à voir la route après avoir incliné votre siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et antidérapant pour vous rehausser, ou si votre véhicule est équipé du réglage en hauteur du siège, remontez-le. • Si votre volant de direction est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela a pour effet d'orienter le sac de sécurité gonflable en direction de votre poitrine plutôt que de votre tête et de votre cou. Réglez votre siège selon ces recommandations de la NHTSA, tout en conservant le contrôle des pédales, du volant de direction et la vue des commandes du tableau de bord. ATTENTION ■ Précautions à observer avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS ● Si vous attachez une rallonge de ceinture de sécurité aux boucles de ceinture de sécurité avant, mais pas au pêne de la ceinture de sécurité, les airbags SRS frontaux détectent que le conducteur et le passager avant ont attaché leur ceinture de sécurité, alors même que ce n'est pas le cas. Dans ce cas, il se peut que les airbags SRS frontaux ne se déploient pas correctement en cas d'accident, et vous risquez d'être tué ou grièvement blessé. Veillez à porter la ceinture de sécurité avec la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité. ● Le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS du passager avant se déploie également avec une violence considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse voire mortelle si le passager se trouve très près du sac de sécurité gonflable. Éloignez le siège passager au maximum du sac de sécurité gonflable, et réglez le dossier de siège de sorte telle sorte que le passager avant soit assis bien droit dans son siège. ● Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou protégés peuvent être grièvement blessés ou tués par le déploiement d'un sac de sécurité gonflable. Installez les enfants trop jeunes pour pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de sécurité dans un siège de sécurité enfant. Lexus recommande vivement d'installer tous les nourrissons et enfants aux places arrière du véhicule et de prévoir pour eux des systèmes de retenue adaptés. C'est à l'arrière que les nourrissons et les enfants sont les mieux protégés. ● N'installez jamais un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route sur le siège passager avant, même si le témoin “AIR BAG OFF” est allumé. En cas d'accident, par la violence et la vitesse de son déploiement, le sac de sécurité gonflable passager avant peut blesser grièvement, voire tuer l'enfant si vous l'avez installé à la place du passager avant dans un siège de sécurité enfant type dos. 560 ATTENTION ■ Précautions à observer avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS ● Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du siège ou ne vous appuyez pas contre la planche de bord. ● Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout devant le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS passager avant ou bien s'asseoir sur les genoux du passager avant. ● Ne conduisez pas le véhicule avec quelque chose sur les genoux, et n'autorisez pas non plus le passager à voyager avec quelque chose sur les genoux. ● Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte, contre le rail latéral de toit ou contre les montants avant, latéraux et arrière. ● Ne laissez personne s'agenouiller sur le siège passager et se pencher vers la porte ou bien mettre sa tête ou ses mains à l'extérieur du véhicule. 7 For owners 561 ATTENTION ■ Précautions à observer avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS ● Ne fixez ni ne posez aucun objet sur le tableau de bord, la garniture centrale du moyeu de volant de direction ou la partie inférieure de la planche de bord. Au déploiement des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS conducteur, passager avant et genoux, tout objet risque de se transformer en projectile. ● Ne fixez aucun objet sur les portes, la vitre de pare-brise, les vitres latérales, les montants avant et arrière, le rail latéral de toit et la poignée de maintien. ● Ne suspendez aux crochets à vêtements aucun cintre nu ni aucun objet dur. En cas de déploiement du sac de sécurité gonflable SRS rideau, ces objets peuvent se transformer en projectiles capables de vous blesser grièvement, voire de vous tuer. ● Si la zone de déploiement du sac de sécurité gonflable SRS genoux est recouverte par une protection en vinyle, retirez celle-ci. ● N'utilisez aucun accessoire de siège venant recouvrir les zones de déploiement des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS latéraux, car il risquerait d'en gêner le déploiement. ● Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux zones renfermant les composants des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS illustrées P. 557. En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un fonctionnement anormal des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS. ● Ne touchez aucun composant du système immédiatement après le déclenchement (déploiement) des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS, car ils sont alors encore très chauds. 562 ATTENTION ■ Précautions à observer avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS ● Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement d'un sac de sécurité gonflable SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l'air frais, ou bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger. Essuyez tout résidu dès que possible afin d'éviter d'éventuelles irritations de la peau. ● Si les parties renfermant les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS, telles que la garniture du moyeu de volant et la garniture de montant avant, apparaissent abîmées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Lexus. ■ Modification et mise au rebut des éléments du système de sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS Consultez impérativement votre concessionnaire Lexus si vous avez besoin d'intervenir sur votre véhicule ou de procéder à l'une des modifications suivantes. Le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement ou de se déclencher (déployer) accidentellement, ce qui pourrait risquer de vous tuer ou blesser grièvement. ● Installation, dépose, démontage et réparations des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS ● Réparations, modifications, dépose ou remplacement du volant, du combiné d'instruments, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garnissage, des montants avant, latéraux et arrière ou des rails latéraux de toit. ● Réparation ou modification des ailes avant, du bouclier avant, ou des flancs de l'habitacle ● Installation d'un chasse-neige, d'un treuil, etc. sur la calandre (pare-buffle, pare- kangourou, etc.) ● Modification des suspensions du véhicule ● Installation d'appareils électroniques, tels qu'un radioémetteur/récepteur ou d'un lecteur CD ● Aménagements du véhicule visant à permettre sa conduite par une personne 7 atteinte d'un handicap physique For owners 563 Headlight aim instructions for Canadian owners (in French) The following is a French explanation of headlight aim instructions from the headlight aim section in this manual. ■ Dépose de l'habillage du compartiment moteur. Avant Extérieur * *: À l'aide d'un outil, dévissez l'écrou jusqu'à pouvoir démonter l'habillage du compartiment moteur. ■ Vis de réglage dans l'axe vertical Vis de réglage A Vis de réglage B 564 ■ Avant de vérifier le réglage du faisceau des phares ÉTAPE 1 Vérifiez que le réservoir de carburant du véhicule est plein et que la carrosserie autour des projecteurs n'a pas subi de choc suffisant pour la déformer. ÉTAPE 2 Stationnez le véhicule bien à plat. ÉTAPE 3 Installez-vous dans le siège conducteur. ÉTAPE 4 Donnez plusieurs impulsions à la carrosserie du véhicule de manière à comprimer/détendre les suspensions. ■ Réglage du faisceau des phares Tournez la vis A dans l'un ou ÉTAPE 1 l'autre sens au moyen d'un tournevis cruciforme (empreinte Phillips). Mémorisez le sens dans lequel vous avez tourné et le nombre de tours. ÉTAPE 2 Tournez la vis B du même nombre de tours dans le même sens qu'en étape 1 au moyen d'un tournevis cruciforme (empreinte Phillips). Si vous n'arrivez pas à régler le projecteur en procédant de la sorte, confiez votre véhicule à votre concessionnaire Lexus pour qu'il règle le faisceau des phares. 7 For owners 565 566 Index Abbreviation list .....................568 Alphabetical index..................570 What to do if... .........................581 For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual” for information regarding the equipment listed below. • • • • • • • Navigation system Audio/video system Air conditioning Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogging Climate control Rear view monitor system Intuitive parking assist 567 Abbreviation list Abbreviation/Acronym list ABBREVIATIONS MEANING ABS Anti-lock Brake System AI-SHIFT Artificial Intelligence Shift ALR Automatic Locking Retractor CRS Child Restraint System DISP Display ECU Electronic Control Unit EDR Event Data Recorder ELR Emergency Locking Retractor EPS Electric Power Steering GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating I/M Emission inspection and maintenance LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LED Light Emitting Diode LSD Limited Slip Differential MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl M+S Mud and Snow MTBE Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether OBD On Board Diagnostics PCS Pre-Collision System SRS Supplemental Restraint System TIN Tire Identification Number TPMS Tire Pressure Warning System TRAC Traction Control VDIM Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management 568 Abbreviation list ABBREVIATIONS MEANING VIN Vehicle Identification Number VSC Vehicle Stability Control 569 Alphabetical index Alphabetical index A A/C* ..........................................................224 ABS.............................................................. 201 ACCESSORY mode ..........................138 Air conditioning filter ..........................434 Air conditioning system Air conditioning filter ....................... 434 Automatic air conditioning system.................................................. 224 Airbags Airbag operating conditions........... 99 Airbag precautions for your child........................................................ 103 Airbag warning light ........................470 Curtain shield airbag operating conditions.............................................. 99 Curtain shield airbag precautions ........................................ 103 Front passenger occupant classification system....................... 108 General airbag precautions ......... 103 Locations of airbags............................ 96 Modification and disposal of airbags...................................................107 Proper driving posture ............94, 103 Side airbag operating conditions.............................................. 99 Side airbag precautions .................. 103 SRS airbags ............................................. 96 Alarm ............................................................90 Antenna* ..................................................242 Anti-lock brake system ....................... 201 Armrest.....................................................356 Ashtrays..................................................... 351 Assist grips...............................................360 Audio input*............................................ 279 Audio system* Antenna.................................................. 242 570 Audio input............................................279 AUX port...............................................279 Bluetooth® audio ............................. 284 CD player/changer......................... 245 iPod .......................................................... 260 MP3/WMA disc................................252 Optimal use .......................................... 277 Portable music player......................279 Radio ........................................................237 Steering wheel audio switch..........281 USB memory ...................................... 268 USB port ...................................260, 268 Automatic air conditioning system*.................................................. 224 Automatic headlight leveling system ......................................................169 Automatic light control system.........166 Automatic transmission Automatic transmission ................... 142 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P...................................503 M mode ................................................... 147 AUX port* .............................................. 279 Auxiliary box .......................................... 344 B Back-up lights Wattage ................................................. 528 Battery Checking................................................. 413 If the vehicle has a discharged battery .................................................508 Preparing and checking before winter......................................218 Bluetooth® audio*...............................284 Bluetooth® phone* .............................303 Bottle holders......................................... 344 Alphabetical index Brake Fluid..............................................................411 Parking brake........................................152 Brake assist...............................................201 C Care Exterior ...................................................384 Interior.....................................................388 Seat belts ...............................................389 Cargo capacity ....................................... 214 Cargo hooks ...........................................362 CD changer* ..........................................245 CD player* ..............................................245 Chains.........................................................218 Child restraint system Booster seats, definition.....................113 Booster seats, installation..................119 Convertible seats, definition ............113 Convertible seats, installation .........119 Front passenger occupant classification system ...................... 108 Infant seats, definition ..........................113 Infant seats, installation........................119 Installing CRS with lower anchorages.......................................... 118 Installing CRS with seat belts ..........119 Installing CRS with top straps....... 123 Child safety Airbag precautions ............................103 Battery precautions.................415, 510 Child restraint system .........................113 Child-protectors....................................47 How your child should wear the seat belt.......................................... 68 Installing child restraints..................... 117 Moon roof precautions......................84 Power window lock switch..............78 Power window precautions ........... 80 Removed electronic key battery precautions........................................437 Seat belt comfort guide .....................66 Seat belt extender precautions......70 Seat belt precautions ..........................69 Seat heater precautions................. 355 Trunk precautions.................................53 Child-protectors...................................... 47 Cigarette lighter....................................352 Cleaning Exterior................................................... 384 Interior ....................................................388 Seat belts............................................... 389 Clock ......................................................... 347 Coat hooks..............................................359 Compass ....................................................371 Condenser .................................................411 Console box ...........................................340 Cooling system Engine overheating..............................511 Cornering assist sensors .................... 195 Cruise control Cruise control........................................177 Dynamic radar cruise control.........181 Cup holders ............................................342 Curtain shield airbags............................96 Customizable features .......................544 *: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. 571 Alphabetical index D Daytime running light system ...........168 Defogger* Rear window........................................ 232 Side mirrors.......................................... 232 Dimension.................................................518 Dinghy towing......................................... 221 Display Dynamic radar cruise control ........ 181 Satellite switch mode.......................348 Trip information....................................162 Warning message............................. 479 Do-it-yourself maintenance .............397 Door courtesy lights Door courtesy lights.........................334 Wattage..................................................528 Door pockets..........................................344 Doors Door lock.................................32, 43, 46 Door windows ....................................... 78 Side mirrors............................................. 76 Driver's seat belt reminder light ..... 472 Driving Correct posture .................................... 94 Procedures.............................................128 Driving position memory......................56 E Electric power steering....................... 201 Electronic key If the electronic key does not operate properly ........................... 505 Emergency flashers Switch ......................................................460 Emergency, in case of If a warning message is displayed ............................................ 479 572 If the electronic key does not operate properly............................505 If the engine will not start............... 502 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P...................................503 If the vehicle has a discharged battery .................................................508 If the warning buzzer sounds...... 469 If the warning light turns on.......... 469 If you have a flat tire ........................ 493 If you lose your keys ........................504 If you think something is wrong ...................................................467 If your vehicle becomes stuck ......514 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency ...........515 If your vehicle needs to be towed..................................................... 461 If your vehicle overheats....................511 Engine ACCESSORY mode.......................138 Compartment..................................... 403 Engine switch ........................................138 Hood .......................................................400 How to start the engine ...................138 Identification number ........................519 If the engine will not start............... 502 Ignition switch .......................................138 Overheating ............................................511 Engine compartment cover.............404 Engine coolant Capacity ................................................ 523 Checking...............................................409 Preparing and checking before winter......................................218 Alphabetical index Engine coolant temperature gauge.......................................................154 Engine immobilizer system................. 88 Engine oil Capacity................................................. 522 Checking...............................................406 Preparing and checking before winter......................................218 EPS...............................................................201 Event data recorder................................22 F First-aid kit storage belt......................362 Floor mat....................................................361 Fluid Brake ...........................................................411 Washer.....................................................416 Fog lights Switch........................................................170 Wattage .................................................528 Footwell lights........................................ 334 Front fog lights Switch........................................................170 Wattage .................................................528 Front passenger occupant classification system ......................... 108 Front passenger's seat belt reminder light......................................472 Front seats Adjustment .............................................. 55 Driving position memory ................. 56 Seat position memory........................ 60 Front turn signal lights Switch..........................................................151 Wattage .................................................528 Fuel Capacity .................................................. 521 Fuel gauge.............................................. 154 Fuel pump shut off system............ 468 Gas station information................. 584 Information ............................................529 Refueling................................................... 85 Fuel door .....................................................85 Fuel filler door ...........................................85 Fuel pump shut off system.................468 Fuses ..........................................................438 G Garage door opener ..........................365 Gas station information......................584 Gauges ...................................................... 154 Glove box ................................................339 Glove box light ......................................339 H Hands-free system for mobile phone* ...................................................303 Hazard lights Switch...................................................... 460 Head restraints Adjusting ..................................................62 Headlight aim .........................................452 Headlight cleaner...................................176 Headlights Discharge headlight precautions....................................... 458 Replacing light bulbs........................454 Switch........................................................ 166 Wattage................................................. 528 *: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. 573 Alphabetical index Heaters Seat heaters..........................................354 Side mirrors.......................................... 232 Hill-start assist control ......................... 201 Hood ......................................................... 400 Hooks Cargo......................................................362 Coat .........................................................359 Shopping bag......................................362 Horn ............................................................ 153 I J 574 I/M test......................................................396 Identification Engine ...................................................... 519 Vehicle..................................................... 519 Ignition switch..........................................138 Illuminated entry system ....................334 Indicator lights.........................................158 Initialization Items to initialize .................................549 Inside rear view mirror .......................... 74 Interior lights Interior lights.........................................334 Switch ......................................................336 Wattage..................................................528 Jack Positioning a floor jack..................... 401 Vehicle-equipped jack ...................493 Jack handle..............................................493 K Keyless entry ............................................. 43 Keys Electronic key .........................................28 Engine switch ........................................138 If the electronic key does not operate properly............................505 If you lose your keys ........................504 Key number..............................................28 Keyless entry............................................43 Keys..............................................................28 Mechanical key ......................................29 Wireless remote control key...........43 L Lexus Enform* Light bulbs Replacing .............................................. 454 Wattage ................................................. 528 Lights Door courtesy lights ........................ 334 Emergency flasher switch.............460 Fog light switch ....................................170 Hazard light switch ..........................460 Headlights switch................................166 Interior light switch ........................... 336 Outer foot lights................................. 334 Personal light switch........................ 336 Replacing light bulbs....................... 454 Shift lever light..................................... 334 Turn signal lever.....................................151 Vanity lights.......................................... 346 Wattage ................................................. 528 Load capacity...........................................217 Alphabetical index M Maintenance Do-it-yourself maintenance......... 397 General maintenance..................... 393 Maintenance data .............................. 518 Maintenance requirements............391 Meter Instrument panel light control .......156 Meters.......................................................154 Micro dust and pollen filter*............ 228 Mirrors Inside rear view mirror .......................74 Side mirror heater..............................232 Side mirrors..............................................76 Vanity mirrors ..................................... 346 Moon roof ....................................................81 MP3 disc* ................................................252 Multi-information display..................... 161 N Noise from under vehicle...................... 19 O Odometer.................................................154 Oil Engine oil...............................................406 Opener Fuel filler door ........................................85 Hood .......................................................400 Trunk............................................................. 51 Outer foot lights Outer foot lights................................. 334 Wattage .................................................528 Outside rear view mirrors Adjusting and folding.......................... 76 Mirror position memory....................56 Outside temperature display ........... 162 Overhead console ................................ 341 Overhead courtesy lights Overhead courtesy lights..............334 Wattage................................................. 528 Overheating, Engine..............................511 P Parking assist sensors*........................ 195 Parking brake.......................................... 152 Parking lights Replacing light bulbs........................454 Switch........................................................ 166 Wattage................................................. 528 PCS ............................................................207 Personal lights Switch.......................................................336 Power outlet............................................353 Power windows ........................................78 Pre-collision system.............................207 *: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. 575 Alphabetical index R Radar cruise control...............................181 Radiator .......................................................411 Radio*........................................................ 237 RDS* ..........................................................239 Rear turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs........................454 Wattage..................................................528 Rear view mirror Compass .................................................371 Rear window defogger* ....................232 Replacing Electronic key battery......................436 Fuses ........................................................438 Light bulbs.............................................454 Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners..........................................552 Reset the maintenance data.............392 S Safety connect .......................................375 Seat belts Adjusting the seat belt........................ 66 Automatic locking retractor............ 67 Child restraint system installation ..............................................117 Cleaning and maintaining the seat belts.....................................389 Emergency locking retractor ......... 67 How to wear your seat belt.............65 How your child should wear the seat belt..........................................68 Pregnant women, proper seat belt use......................... 67 Reminder light......................................472 Seat belt extenders..............................68 Seat belt pretensioners...................... 66 576 Seat heaters............................................354 Seat position memory............................ 60 Seating capacity......................................217 Seats Adjustment .............................................. 55 Adjustment precautions ................... 55 Child seats/child restraint system installation.............................. 117 Cleaning ................................................388 Driver’s seat position memory ...... 56 Front passenger seat position memory ................................................. 60 Head restraints.......................................62 Properly sitting in the seat.................94 Seat heaters ......................................... 354 Service reminder indicators ............ 158 Shift lever If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P...................................503 Transmission.......................................... 142 Shift lever light ....................................... 334 Shift lock system....................................503 Shopping bag hooks ........................... 362 Side airbags ............................................... 96 Side marker lights Switch........................................................166 Side mirrors Adjusting and folding..........................76 Mirror position memory................... 56 Smart access system with push-button start Entry function ..........................................32 Starting the engine..............................138 “SOS” button.......................................... 375 Alphabetical index Spare tire Inflation pressure ............................... 428 Storage location................................. 493 Spark plug ................................................524 Specifications...........................................518 Speedometer...........................................154 Steering wheel Adjustment ...............................................72 Audio switches .....................................281 Steering wheel position memory ................................................. 56 Storage feature..................................... 338 Stuck If your vehicle becomes stuck ......514 Sun visors................................................. 345 Sunshade .................................................... 82 Switch Emergency flasher switch.............460 Engine switch ........................................138 Fog light switch.....................................170 F-sport mode total control switch .........................................144, 203 Hazard light switch...........................460 Ignition switch........................................138 Light switches........................................166 Power door lock switch ....................46 Power window switch ........................78 Satellite switches................................ 348 SNOW switch ......................................144 Transmission shift switches...................................... 145, 147 VSC off switch ....................................202 Window lock switch............................78 Wiper and washer switch................172 T Tachometer.............................................. 154 Tail lights Switch........................................................ 166 Talk switch* ............................................ 308 Telephone switch*............................... 308 Theft deterrent system Alarm...........................................................90 Engine immobilizer system............. 88 Theft prevention labels..........................93 Tire inflation pressure .........................428 Tire information Glossary.................................................537 Size............................................................534 Tire identification number..............534 Uniform tire quality grading ........ 535 *: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. 577 Alphabetical index Tires Chains .......................................................218 Checking .................................................417 If you have a flat tire..........................493 Inflation pressure................................428 Inflation pressure sensor..................417 Information............................................532 Replacing...............................................493 Rotating tires ..........................................417 Size ........................................................... 527 Snow tires................................................218 Tools...........................................................493 Total load capacity .................................217 Towing Dinghy towing....................................... 221 Emergency towing .............................461 Trailer towing.......................................220 TRAC.......................................................... 201 Traction control...................................... 201 Transmission shift switches.......145, 147 Trip meter ................................................. 154 Trunk Extending trunk space ....................357 Opener........................................................51 Trunk light Trunk light................................................. 52 Wattage..................................................528 578 Turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs....................... 454 Switch..........................................................151 Wattage ................................................. 528 U USB port* .................................... 260, 268 V Vanity lights Vanity lights.......................................... 346 Wattage ................................................. 528 Vanity mirrors ........................................ 346 VDIM.......................................................... 201 Vehicle data recordings.........................21 Vehicle dynamics integrated management ........................................ 201 Vehicle identification number.......... 519 Vehicle stability control ...................... 201 Voice command switch .....................308 VSC ............................................................ 201 W Warning buzzers Brake system....................................... 469 Open door ...........................................472 Seat belt reminder .............................472 Alphabetical index Warning lights Anti-lock brake system .................. 470 Brake assist system .......................... 470 Brake system....................................... 469 Charging system............................... 470 Electric power steering system warning light..................................... 470 Low fuel level........................................472 Malfunction indicator lamp .......... 470 Master warning light.........................472 Open door ............................................472 Pre-collision system......................... 470 Pretensioners ...................................... 470 Seat belt reminder light ...................472 SRS airbags.......................................... 470 Tire pressure warning light.........................................................472 Warning messages Automatic transmission fluid ....................................................... 483 Dynamic radar cruise control.........................481, 483 Engine oil level ................................... 483 Engine oil maintenance ................. 483 Engine oil pressure ..........................480 Engine oil temperature ..................480 Headlight................................................. 481 Hood....................................................... 483 Intuitive parking assist...........481, 483 Moon roof ............................................ 483 Open door........................................... 483 Parking brake ..................................... 483 Pre-collision system...............481, 483 Smart access system with push-button start ........................... 489 Steering lock.......................................... 481 Trunk ....................................................... 483 Washer fluid ........................................ 483 Washer Checking ................................................ 416 Preparing and checking before winter ..................................... 218 Switch.........................................................172 Washing and waxing...........................384 *: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. 579 Alphabetical index Weight Cargo capacity.....................................214 Load limits ............................................... 217 Weight ..................................................... 518 Wheels ......................................................432 Window glasses ......................................78 Window lock switch ...............................78 Windows Power windows..................................... 78 Rear window defogger .................. 232 Washer..................................................... 172 Windshield wipers..................................172 Windshield wiper de-icer..................233 Wireless remote control key Replacing the battery ......................436 WMA disc* .............................................252 *: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. 580 What to do if... What to do if... A tire punctures P. 493 If you have a flat tire P. 502 If the engine will not start The engine does not start P. 88 Engine immobilizer system P. 508 If the vehicle battery is discharged The shift lever cannot be moved out of P P. 503 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P P. 511 If your vehicle overheats The display on the engine coolant temperature gauge flashes Steam can be seen coming from under the hood The key is lost P. 504 If you lose your keys The battery runs out P. 508 If the vehicle battery is discharged The doors cannot be locked P. 46 Doors The horn begins to sound P. 90 Alarm The vehicle is stuck in mud or sand P. 514 If the vehicle becomes stuck 581 What to do if... A warning light or indicator light comes on P. 469 If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... ■Warning lights Brake system warning light or or P. 469 P. 470 Driver’s seat belt reminder light P. 472 ABS warning light or P. 470 Low fuel level warning light P. 472 582 Malfunction indicator lamp Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light P. 472 Master warning light P. 472 What to do if... SRS warning light P. 470 Open door warning light P. 472 Charging system warning light P. 470 Electric power steering system warning light P. 470 Pre-collision system warning light P. 470 Tire pressure warning light P. 472 Slip indicator P. 470 A warning message is displayed P. 479 If a warning message is displayed 583 GAS STATION INFORMATION Auxiliary catch lever P. 400 Trunk opener P. 51 Hood lock release lever P. 400 Fuel tank capacity (Reference) Fuel type Cold tire inflation pressure Engine oil capacity (Drain and refill reference) Engine oil type 584 Fuel filler door opener P. 85 Fuel filler door P. 85 Tire inflation pressure P. 527 16.9 gal. (64 L, 14.0 Imp. gal.) P. 86, 521 P. 527 qt. (L, Imp. qt.) Without filter 8.7 (8.2, 7.2) With filter 9.8 (9.3, 8.2) P. 522

Lexus IS F 2013 Owner's Manual

Related manuals

Lexus

IS F 2014

Lexus

GX470

Lexus

IS350

Lexus

Is250 2007

Lexus

IS F

Lexus

IS F

Lexus

2009 IS

Lexus

IS 350

Lexus

IS F

Lexus

LS430 2006

Lexus

LX470 2007

Lexus

Is250 2008